SÄNDTAG VHF/UHF M3952-722010 SÄNDTAG VHF/UHF

Transcription

FÖRSVARETS MATERIELVERK
Teknisk chef Ledn
TEKNISK ORDER ALLMÄN
Marktele
2010-03-01
Rohde&Schwarz
AF SAMBAND
100
017307
Sida 1 (10)
M3SR (XT4410A)
SÄNDTAG VHF/UHF
SÄNDTAG VHF/UHF GRX
SÄNDTAGARE RA755
M3952-722010
M3952-722110
M3952-755010
Apparatbeskrivning Rohde&Schwarz M3SR
Rohde&Schwarz M3SR
Tekniskt ansvarig:
Publikationsansvarig:
FMV: AK Led/Radio Hans Jonsson
FMV: AK Led/Lednpl Ingvar Utterström
TO-grupp:
SAMBAND 100
Upphäver:
Combitech AB, ref: MaH
Förrådsbeteckning: M7784-014380
Distribution:
MS 520
Marktele
AF SAMBAND
100
017307
Sida 2
2010-03-01
Innehåll
Sida
1
1.1
1.2
2
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
4
Allmänt, orientering .............................................................. 3
Modellbeskrivning R&S M3SR inom FM.............................. 3
Korsreferenslista M3SR, R&S – FM .................................... 4
Tekniska data....................................................................... 4
Uppbyggnad......................................................................... 6
Mekanisk konstruktion ......................................................... 6
Elektrisk konstruktion ........................................................... 8
Externa anslutningar ............................................................ 9
Framsida .......................................................................... 9
Baksida ............................................................................ 9
Funktion ............................................................................. 10
Bilagor
1.
Antal sidor
Operating Manual M3SR VHF, UHF and VHF/UHF
TRANSCEIVERS (Software Release 15.00).pdf
316
Marktele
2010-03-01
1
Allmänt, orientering
Rohde & Schwarz M3SR (Multiband, Multimode and Multirole Surface
Radio) är en flexible sändtagare för militära likväl som för civila
tillämpningar.
Sändtagaren är designad som en avancerad, pålitlig och dynamisk
kommunikationsplattform för att möta kraven för fasta som mobila
kommunikationslösningar.
Sändtagaren kan användas för sändning och mottagning av analogt tal,
digitalt tal och data för de mest vanliga modulationstyperna (AM, FM)
konfigurerat antigen som narrowband eller wideband.
Sändningen kan ske, med fasta frekvenser, på VHF- och/eller UHFbandet beroende på modell.
1.1
Modellbeskrivning R&S M3SR inom FM
Nedan beskrivs kort hur R&S ursprungsbeteckning ändras på radion
beroende på vilken/vilka optioner som är installerade i radion. Endast de
varianter som finns inom FM beskrivs nedan.
Modellbeteckningen XT4410A betyder följande:
XT:
44:
10:
A:
X=Sändtagare, T=VHF/UHF
Modellnummer
10=Control unit monterad (60=Control unit ej monterad)
Vågform=Fixed Frequency
Tabell 1 Modeller, M3SR
R&S benämning
R&S beteckning
Optioner monterade
XT4410A
6102.0307.03
OCXO
XT4410A
6102.0307.13
OCXO + Link 11
XT4410A
6102.0307.31
OCXO + VHF/UHF Guard Receiver
Den enklaste varianten av XT4410A som finns inom FM är den som har
optionen OCXO. Inom FM finns ytterligare två varianter, den med Link
11 och den med Guard Receiver.
Uppdatering av programvara för optionen Link 11 eller montering av
modul för optionen Guard Receiver eller någon annan möjlig option,
kan göras för att få önskad variant. Beroende på vilken option, kan viss
komplettering behöva göras såsom t.ex. utökat internkablage , ny
programvara etc. För mer information hänvisas till tillverkarens
dokumentation enligt nedan.
Bilaga 1, Kapitel: 1. User information
Avsnitt: 1.2 Explanation of Models
AF SAMBAND
100
017307
Sida 3
Marktele
AF SAMBAND
100
017307
Sida 4
2010-03-01
1.2
Korsreferenslista M3SR, R&S – FM
Tabell 2 Korsreferenslista M3SR, R&S - FM
2
R&S-beteckning
Förrådsbeteckning
Förrådsbenämning
Anmärkning
6102.0307.03
SÄNDTAG VHF/UHF
M3952-722010
Flygvapnet
6102.0307.13
SÄNDTAGARE RA755
M3952-755010
Marinen
6102.0307.31
SÄNDTAG VHF/UHF GRX
M3952-722110
Flygvapnet
Tekniska data
Tabell 3 Tekniska data, M3SR
Frekvensområde
100-512 MHz
Vågformer (standard radio)
VHF (108 MHz to 173.975 MHz):
- LOS FM
- LOS AM
- Civil ATC AM acc. to EN300676
UHF (225 MHz to 399.975 MHz):
- LOS FM
- LOS AM
- STANAG4205
Vågformer (tillval)
- HAVE QUICK I/II acc. To STANAG4246
- SATURN acc. to STANAG4372
- UHF DAMA with external modem acc. to
MIL-STD-188-181/2/3 on request
- LINK 11 with external modem acc. To
STANAG5511
- LINK 22 with external modem acc. To
STANAG5522 on request
- LINK 4A with external modem acc. To
- LINK Y Mk2 with external modem on request
- SECOS voice, Rohde&Schwarz
TRANSEC/COMSEC waveform
Marktele
2010-03-01
- SECOS with data preprocessor (DPP)
- SECOS with TDMA on request
- Other waveforms on request
Frekvensstabilitet
<0.1 ppm (10–7) med OCXO
Kanaldelning
8.33 kHz, 25kHz
Temperaturområde
Drift:
-20 °C - +55 °C
Förråd:
-40 °C - +70 °C
Sändaruteffekt (28VDC)
AM:
30W (1-30W justerbart)
FM:
100W (1-100W justerbart)
Mottagarkänslighet
(för S+N/N=10dB och fm= 1kHz)
AM (30%):
≤–107 dBm (low-noise mode)
≤–101 dBm (low-distortion mode)
FM (±3,5kHz):
Dimensioner
3 HE
Vikt
Ca 17 kg
Driftspänning
MAIN (X31):
28VDC ±1V
BATTERY (X32):
19-31VDC
Antennanslutning
Sändtagare:
N
Guard Receiver:
BNC
För mer information hänvisas till tillverkarens dokumentation enligt
nedan.
Bilaga 1, Kapitel: A2. Drawings
Avsnitt: Data Sheet
AF SAMBAND
100
017307
Sida 5
Marktele
AF SAMBAND
100
017307
Sida 6
2010-03-01
3
3.1
Uppbyggnad
Mekanisk konstruktion
Tabell 4 Ingående delar, M3SR
Pos
Benämning
1
Interface Module R&S GH 4450
2
Radio Platform (part of Radio Basis R&S KR 4400)
3
VHF/UHF Synthesizer R&S GF 4400T
4
VHF/UHF Receiver R&S ET 4400
5
UHF Filter R&S FD 4430
6
Frame (part of Radio Basis R&S KR 4400)
Anmärkning
Ingår ej i de varianter som
FM har anskaffat
Marktele
2010-03-01
7
Control Unit R&S GB 4000C
8
Front Panel Unit (part of Radio Basis R&S KR 4400)
9
VHF/UHF Transmitter Board with DC Power Supply
underneath (both are part of Transmitter Unit R&S VT
4403)
10
Heatsink with two fans (part of Transmitter Unit R&S
VT 4403)
För ytterligare information hänvisas till tillverkarens dokumentation
enligt nedan.
Bilaga 1, Kapitel: User Information
Avsnitt: 1.5 Design
AF SAMBAND
100
017307
Sida 7
Marktele
2010-03-01
3.2
Elektrisk konstruktion
Nedan beskrivs radions elektriska konstruktion schematiskt.
För ytterligare information hänvisas till tillverkarens dokumentation
enligt nedan.
Bilaga 1, Kapitel: User Information
Avsnitt: 1.6 Functioning
AF SAMBAND
100
017307
Sida 8
Marktele
2010-03-01
3.3
Externa anslutningar
Nedan listas de externa anslutningar som finns på radion.
3.3.1
Framsida
Tabell 5 Externa anslutningar M3SR, framsida
Anslutning Benämning
X4
Service / Fill (HCCP)
X5
Service / Fill (HBASFP)
X6
Ethernet Connection
X7
Headset Connection
För ytterligare information, och stift disponering, hänvisas till
tillverkarens dokumentation enligt nedan.
Avsnitt: Interface Description och External Interfaces
3.3.2
Baksida
AF SAMBAND
100
017307
Sida 9
Marktele
2010-03-01
Tabell 6 Externa anslutningar M3SR, baksida
Anslutning Benämning
X10
Service / Fill (HCCP)
X11
Service / Fill (HBASFP)
X20
Ethernet Connection
X21
Headset Connection
X22
RS232 Connection
X23
Miscellaneous 1
X24
RS485 / RS422 / RS232
X25
AF Interface 2
X26
AF Interface 1
X27
Filter/Amplifier Control 1
X28
Filter/Amplifier Control 2
X30
Antenna
X31
Mains Connection
X32
Battery Connection
X33
External Power Supply
För ytterligare information, och stift konfigurering, hänvisas till
tillverkarens dokumentation enligt nedan.
Avsnitt: Interface Description och External Interfaces
4
Funktion
För information om radions funktioner och handhavande hänvisas till
BCN (Bakre Central Nivå) enligt gällande UHP-M och till tillverkarens
dokumentation enligt nedan.
Bilaga 1, Kapitel: 3. Operation
Avsnitt: 3.1 – 3.6
AF SAMBAND
100
017307
Sida 10
Bilaga 1 till TO AF SAMBAND 100 017307
Operating Manual
Radio Communication Systems
Division
e.g. Local-controlled Transceiver (Ruggedized)
R&S ® M3SR
VHF, UHF and VHF/UHF TRANSCEIVERS
R&S® M3SR Software Release: 15.00 (R&S® DS 4400A)
i
6125.1651.12.02
©2008
Copying of this document as well as any other utilization and communication of its content
are only admissible with the permission of the originator or other authorized persons.
Any disregard will be prosecuted and is subject to restitution (UrhG, UWG, BGB). For the case
a patent is issued or the design is officially registered all rights are reserved.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
All other product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15
D-81671 München
www.rohde-schwarz.com
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
Subject to change
Data without tolerances: order of magnitude only
0708
6125.1651.12.02
ii
Certified Quality System
DIN EN ISO 9001 : 2000
DIN EN
9100 : 2003
DIN EN ISO 14001 : 2004
DQS REG. NO 001954 QM UM
QUALITÄTSZERTIFIKAT
CERTIFICATE OF QUALITY
CERTIFICAT DE QUALITÉ
Sehr geehrter Kunde,
Sie haben sich für den Kauf eines
Rohde & Schwarz-Produktes entschieden. Hiermit erhalten Sie ein nach
modernsten Fertigungsmethoden
hergestelltes Produkt. Es wurde nach
den Regeln unseres Managementsystems entwickelt, gefertigt und
geprüft.
Das Rohde & Schwarz Managementsystem ist zertifiziert nach:
Dear Customer,
you have decided to buy a Rohde &
Schwarz product. You are thus assured of receiving a product that is
manufactured using the most modern
methods available. This product was
developed, manufactured and tested
in compliance with our quality management system standards.
The Rohde & Schwarz quality management system is certified according to:
Cher Client,
vous avez choisi d‘acheter un produit
Rohde & Schwarz. Vous disposez
donc d‘un produit fabriqué d‘après
les méthodes les plus avancées. Le
développement, la fabrication et les
tests respectent nos normes de gestion qualité.
Le système de gestion qualité de
Rohde & Schwarz a été homologué
conformément aux normes:
DIN EN ISO 9001:2000
DIN EN 9100:2003
DIN EN ISO 14001:2004
DIN EN 9100:2003
DIN EN ISO 14001:2004
DIN EN 9100:2003
DIN EN ISO 14001:2004
1171.0200.11-02.00
12
Address List
Headquarters, Plants and Subsidiaries
Locations Worldwide
Headquarters
Please refer to our homepage: www.rohde-schwarz.com
◆ Sales Locations
◆ Service Locations
◆ National Websites
ROHDE&SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstraße 15 · D-81671 München
P.O.Box 80 14 69 · D-81614 München
Phone +49 (89) 41 29-0
Fax +49 (89) 41 29-121 64
[email protected]
Plants
ROHDE&SCHWARZ Messgerätebau GmbH
Riedbachstraße 58 · D-87700 Memmingen
P.O.Box 16 52 · D-87686 Memmingen
Phone +49 (83 31) 1 08-0
+49 (83 31) 1 08-1124
[email protected]
Werk Teisnach
Kaikenrieder Straße 27 · D-94244 Teisnach
P.O.Box 11 49 · D-94240 Teisnach
Phone +49 (99 23) 8 50-0
Fax +49 (99 23) 8 50-174
[email protected]
ROHDE&SCHWARZ závod
Vimperk, s.r.o.
Location Spidrova 49
CZ-38501 Vimperk
Dienstleistungszentrum Köln
Graf-Zeppelin-Straße 18 · D-51147 Köln
P.O.Box 98 02 60 · D-51130 Köln
Phone +420 (388) 45 21 09
Fax +420 (388) 45 21 13
Phone +49 (22 03) 49-0
Fax +49 (22 03) 49 51-229
[email protected]
[email protected]
Subsidiaries
R&S BICK Mobilfunk GmbH
Fritz-Hahne-Str. 7 · D-31848 Bad Münder
P.O.Box 20 02 · D-31844 Bad Münder
Phone +49 (50 42) 9 98-0
Fax +49 (50 42) 9 98-105
[email protected]
ROHDE&SCHWARZ FTK GmbH
Wendenschloßstraße 168, Haus 28
D-12557 Berlin
Phone +49 (30) 658 91-122
Fax +49 (30) 655 50-221
[email protected]
ROHDE&SCHWARZ SIT GmbH
Am Studio 3
D-12489 Berlin
Phone +49 (30) 658 84-0
Fax +49 (30) 658 84-183
[email protected]
R&S Systems GmbH
Graf-Zeppelin-Straße 18
D-51147 Köln
GEDIS GmbH
Sophienblatt 100
D-24114 Kiel
HAMEG Instruments GmbH
Industriestraße 6
D-63533 Mainhausen
1171.0200.42-02.00
Phone +49 (22 03) 49-5 23 25
Fax +49 (22 03) 49-5 23 36
[email protected]
Phone +49 (431) 600 51-0
Fax +49 (431) 600 51-11
[email protected]
Phone +49 (61 82) 800-0
Fax +49 (61 82) 800-100
[email protected]
12
Customer Support
Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our
Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone
support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the
operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz equipment.
Up-to-date information and upgrades
To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes
related to your instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center
stating your instrument and your wish.
We will take care that you will get the right information.
USA & Canada
East Asia
Rest of the World
Monday to Friday (except US public holidays)
8:00 AM – 8:00 PM Eastern Standard Time (EST)
Tel. from USA
From outside USA
Fax
888-test-rsa (888-837-8772) (opt 2)
+1 410 910 7800 (opt 2)
+1 410 910 7801
E-mail
[email protected]
Monday to Friday (except Singaporean public holidays)
8:30 AM – 6:00 PM Singapore Time (SGT)
Tel.
Fax
+65 6 513 0488
+65 6 846 1090
E-mail
[email protected]
Monday to Friday (except German public holidays)
08:00 – 17:00 Central European Time (CET)
Tel. from Europe
+49 (0) 180 512 42 42*
From outside Europe +49 89 4129 13776
Fax
+49 (0) 89 41 29 637 78
E-mail
[email protected]
* 0.14 €/Min within the German fixed-line telephone network, varying prices
for the mobile telephone network and in different countries.
1171.0200.22-02.00
Grouped Safety Messages
Make sure to read through and observe the following safety instructions!
All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety
standard of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our
products and the auxiliary equipment required for them are designed and tested in accordance with the
relevant safety standards. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality
assurance system. The product described here has been designed and tested in accordance with the EC
Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s plant in a condition fully complying with safety
standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, observe all instructions and warnings
provided in this manual. If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions, the Rohde &
Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed
for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must
not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the
product is used for an intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's
instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation
and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the product requires technical skills and a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore essential that only
skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the
product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this will be indicated at
the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions and the product
documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users.
Symbols and safety labels
Observe
product
documentation
Weight
indication for
units >18 kg
Supply
voltage
ON/OFF
Danger of
electric
shock
Standby
indication
Direct
current
(DC)
Warning!
Hot
surface
PE terminal
Alternating
current (AC)
Ground
Direct/alternating
current (DC/AC)
Ground
terminal
Attention!
Electrostatic
sensitive devices
Device fully protected
by double/reinforced
insulation
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before putting the product into operation. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In these safety
instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde & Schwarz
group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories.
1171.0000.42-04.00
Sheet 1
Tags and their meaning
DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE indicates a property damage message.
In the product documentation, the word ATTENTION is used synonymously.
These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic
Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or
military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used
only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The use of tags in
connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and thus contribute to
personal injury or material damage.
Basic safety instructions
1. The product may be operated only under the
operating conditions and in the positions
specified by the manufacturer. Its ventilation
must not be obstructed during operation.
Unless otherwise specified, the following
requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz
products:
prescribed operating position is always with
the housing floor facing down, IP protection
2X, pollution severity 2, overvoltage category
2, use only in enclosed spaces, max.
operation altitude 2000 m above sea level,
max. transport altitude 4500 m above sea
level.
A tolerance of ±10% shall apply to the
nominal voltage and of ±5% to the nominal
frequency.
2. Applicable local or national safety
regulations and rules for the prevention of
accidents must be observed in all work
performed. The product may be opened only
by authorized, specially trained personnel.
Prior to performing any work on the product
or opening the product, the product must be
disconnected from the supply network. Any
adjustments, replacements of parts,
maintenance or repair must be carried out
only by technical personnel authorized by
1171.0000.42-04.00
Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may
be used for replacing parts relevant to safety
(e.g. power switches, power transformers,
fuses). A safety test must always be
performed after parts relevant to safety have
been replaced (visual inspection, PE
conductor test, insulation resistance
measurement, leakage current
measurement, functional test).
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods,
the use of substances that induce an allergic
reaction (allergens, e.g. nickel) such as
aluminum cannot be generally excluded. If
you develop an allergic reaction (such as a
skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or
respiratory difficulties), consult a physician
immediately to determine the cause.
4. If products/components are mechanically
and/or thermically processed in a manner
that goes beyond their intended use,
hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust
such as lead, beryllium, nickel) may be
released. For this reason, the product may
only be disassembled, e.g. for disposal
purposes, by specially trained personnel.
Improper disassembly may be hazardous to
your health. National waste disposal
regulations must be observed.
Sheet 2
5. If handling the product yields hazardous
substances or fuels that must be disposed of
in a special way, e.g. coolants or engine oils
that must be replenished regularly, the safety
instructions of the manufacturer of the
hazardous substances or fuels and the
applicable regional waste disposal
regulations must be observed. Also observe
the relevant safety instructions in the product
documentation.
6. Depending on the function, certain products
such as RF radio equipment can produce an
elevated level of electromagnetic radiation.
Considering that unborn life requires
increased protection, pregnant women
should be protected by appropriate
measures. Persons with pacemakers may
also be endangered by electromagnetic
radiation. The employer/operator is required
to assess workplaces where there is a
special risk of exposure to radiation and, if
necessary, take measures to avert the
danger.
7. Operating the products requires special
training and intense concentration. Make
certain that persons who use the products
are physically, mentally and emotionally fit
enough to handle operating the products;
otherwise injuries or material damage may
occur. It is the responsibility of the employer
to select suitable personnel for operating the
products.
8. Prior to switching on the product, it must be
ensured that the nominal voltage setting on
the product matches the nominal voltage of
the AC supply network. If a different voltage
is to be set, the power fuse of the product
may have to be changed accordingly.
9. In the case of products of safety class I with
movable power cord and connector,
operation is permitted only on sockets with
earthing contact and protective earth
connection.
10. Intentionally breaking the protective earth
connection either in the feed line or in the
product itself is not permitted. Doing so can
result in the danger of an electric shock from
the product. If extension cords or connector
strips are implemented, they must be
checked on a regular basis to ensure that
they are safe to use.
11. If the product has no power switch for
disconnection from the AC supply, the plug
1171.0000.42-04.00
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
of the connecting cable is regarded as the
disconnecting device. In such cases, it must
be ensured that the power plug is easily
reachable and accessible at all times
(corresponding to the length of connecting
cable, approx. 2 m). Functional or electronic
switches are not suitable for providing
disconnection from the AC supply. If
products without power switches are
integrated in racks or systems, a
disconnecting device must be provided at
the system level.
Never use the product if the power cable is
damaged. Check the power cable on a
regular basis to ensure that it is in proper
operating condition. By taking appropriate
safety measures and carefully laying the
power cable, ensure that the cable cannot be
damaged and that no one can be hurt by e.g.
tripping over the cable or suffering an electric
shock.
The product may be operated only from
TN/TT supply networks fused with max. 16 A
(higher fuse only after consulting with the
Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
Do not insert the plug into sockets that are
dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all
the way into the socket. Otherwise, this can
result in sparks, fire and/or injuries.
Do not overload any sockets, extension
cords or connector strips; doing so can
cause fire or electric shocks.
For measurements in circuits with voltages
Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g.
appropriate measuring equipment, fusing,
current limiting, electrical separation,
insulation) should be taken to avoid any
hazards.
Ensure that the connections with information
technology equipment comply with IEC
950/EN 60950.
Unless expressly permitted, never remove
the cover or any part of the housing while the
product is in operation. Doing so will expose
circuits and components and can lead to
injuries, fire or damage to the product.
If a product is to be permanently installed,
the connection between the PE terminal on
site and the product's PE conductor must be
made first before any other connection is
made. The product may be installed and
connected only by a license electrician.
Sheet 3
20. For permanently installed equipment without
built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar
protective devices, the supply circuit must be
fused in such a way that suitable protection
is provided for users and products.
21. Do not insert any objects into the openings in
the housing that are not designed for this
purpose. Never pour any liquids onto or into
the housing. This can cause short circuits
inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire
or injuries.
22. Use suitable overvoltage protection to
ensure that no overvoltage (such as that
caused by a thunderstorm) can reach the
product. Otherwise the operating personnel
will be endangered by electric shocks.
23. Rohde & Schwarz products are not protected
against penetration of liquids, unless
otherwise specified (see also safety
instruction 1.). If this is not taken into
account, there exists the danger of electric
shock for the user or damage to the product,
which can also lead to personal injury.
24. Never use the product under conditions in
which condensation has formed or can form
in or on the product, e.g. if the product was
moved from a cold to a warm environment.
25. Do not close any slots or openings on the
product, since they are necessary for
ventilation and prevent the product from
overheating. Do not place the product on soft
surfaces such as sofas or rugs or inside a
closed housing, unless this is well ventilated.
26. Do not place the product on heat-generating
devices such as radiators or fan heaters.
The temperature of the environment must
not exceed the maximum temperature
specified in the data sheet.
27. Batteries and storage batteries must not be
exposed to high temperatures or fire. Keep
batteries and storage batteries away from
children. Do not short-circuit batteries and
storage batteries.
If batteries or storage batteries are
improperly replaced, this can cause an
explosion (warning: lithium cells). Replace
the battery or storage battery only with the
matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see spare
parts list). Batteries and storage batteries
must be recycled and kept separate from
residual waste. Batteries and storage
batteries that contain lead, mercury or
cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe the
1171.0000.42-04.00
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
national regulations regarding waste
disposal and recycling.
Please be aware that in the event of a fire,
toxic substances (gases, liquids etc.) that
may be hazardous to your health may
escape from the product.
The product can be very heavy. Be careful
when moving it to avoid back or other
physical injuries.
Do not place the product on surfaces,
vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons
of weight or stability are unsuitable for this
purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's
installation instructions when installing the
product and fastening it to objects or
structures (e.g. walls and shelves).
Handles on the products are designed
exclusively for personnel to hold or carry the
product. It is therefore not permissible to use
handles for fastening the product to or on
means of transport such as cranes, fork lifts,
wagons, etc. The user is responsible for
securely fastening the products to or on the
means of transport and for observing the
safety regulations of the manufacturer of the
means of transport. Noncompliance can
result in personal injury or material damage.
If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the
sole responsibility of the driver to drive the
vehicle safely. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or
other damage in the event of an accident.
Never use the product in a moving vehicle if
doing so could distract the driver of the
vehicle. The driver is always responsible for
the safety of the vehicle. The manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for accidents or
collisions.
If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is
integrated in a Rohde & Schwarz product, do
not use any other settings or functions than
those described in the product documentation. Otherwise this may be hazardous to
your health, since the laser beam can cause
irreversible damage to your eyes. Never try
to take such products apart, and never look
into the laser beam.
Prior to cleaning, disconnect the product
from the AC supply. Use a soft, non-linting
cloth to clean the product. Never use
chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol,
acetone or diluent for cellulose lacquers.
Sheet 4
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
¡Es imprescindible leer y observar las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones
de seguridad!
El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al día
con los estándares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros
productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de
seguridad vigentes. Nuestra sección de gestión de la seguridad de calidad controla constantemente que
sean cumplidas estas normas. El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el comprobante
de conformidad adjunto según las normas de la CE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable
según los estándares técnicos de seguridad. Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un
funcionamiento libre de peligros, el usuario deberá atenerse a todas las indicaciones, informaciones de
seguridad y notas de alerta. El grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en
caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad.
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
está destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o, si ha sido expresamente
autorizado, para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna
persona/cosa pueda sufrir daño. El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o despreciando las
informaciones de seguridad del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se
hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto.
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado dentro de las
instrucciones de la correspondiente documentación de producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento
definido (ver hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto
hace necesarios conocimientos profundos y conocimientos básicas del idioma inglés. Por eso se debe
tener en cuenta que el producto sólo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas
minuciosamente instruidas con las capacidades correspondientes. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de
seguridad para el uso de productos de R&S, encontrará la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente. Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales, así
como la documentación del producto y entréguela a usuarios posteriores.
Símbolos y definiciones de seguridad
Ver
documentación de
producto
Informaciones
para
maquinaria
con un peso
de > 18kg
Potencia EN
MARCHA/PARADA
1171.0000.42-04.00
Peligro de
golpe de
corriente
Indicación
Stand-by
¡Advertencia!
Superficie
caliente
Corriente
continua DC
Corriente
alterna AC
Conexión a
conductor
protector
Conexión
a tierra
Corriente continua/alterna DC/AC
Conexión
a masa
conductora
¡Cuidado!
Elementos de
construcción con
peligro de carga
electroestática
El aparato está protegido en
su totalidad por un
aislamiento de doble refuerzo
Sheet 5
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar daños y peligros de toda clase.
Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se tengan en
cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto. También deberán ser tenidas en
cuenta las informaciones para la protección de personas que encontrarán en el capítulo correspondiente
de la documentación de producto y que también son obligatorias de seguir. En las informaciones de
seguridad actuales hemos juntado todos los objetos vendidos por el grupo de empresas Rohde &
Schwarz bajo la denominación de „producto“, entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así como toda
clase de accesorios.
Palabras de señal y su significado
PELIGRO
Identifica un peligro directo con riesgo elevado de provocar muerte o
lesiones de gravedad si no se toman las medidas oportunas.
ADVERTENCIA
Identifica un posible peligro con riesgo medio de provocar muerte o
lesiones (de gravedad) si no se toman las medidas oportunas.
ATENCIÓN
Identifica un peligro con riesgo reducido de provocar lesiones de
gravedad media o leve si no se toman las medidas oportunas.
AVISO
Indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y a consecuencia
dañarlo.
En la documentación del producto se emplea de forma sinónima el
término CUIDADO.
Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el área
económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición en otras áreas económicas o
en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se deberá tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas
sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinación con la correspondiente documentación de producto y
solamente en combinación con el producto correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en
combinación con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a
malinterpretaciones y tener por consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.
Informaciones de seguridad elementales
1. El producto solamente debe ser utilizado
según lo indicado por el fabricante referente a
la situación y posición de funcionamiento sin
que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se
convino de otra manera, es para los productos
R&S válido lo que sigue:
como posición de funcionamiento se define
por principio la posición con el suelo de la caja
para abajo, modo de protección IP 2X, grado
de suciedad 2, categoría de sobrecarga
eléctrica 2, utilizar solamente en estancias
interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m sobre el
nivel del mar, transporte hasta 4.500 m sobre
el nivel del mar.
Se aplicará una tolerancia de ±10% sobre el
voltaje nominal y de ±5% sobre la frecuencia
nominal.
2. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en
cuenta las normas locales de seguridad de
1171.0000.42-04.00
trabajo y de prevención de accidentes. El
producto solamente debe de ser abierto por
personal especializado autorizado. Antes de
efectuar trabajos en el producto o abrirlo
deberá este ser desconectado de la corriente.
El ajuste, el cambio de partes, la manutención
y la reparación deberán ser solamente
efectuadas por electricistas autorizados por
R&S. Si se reponen partes con importancia
para los aspectos de seguridad (por ejemplo
el enchufe, los transformadores o los fusibles),
solamente podrán ser sustituidos por partes
originales. Después de cada recambio de
partes elementales para la seguridad deberá
ser efectuado un control de seguridad (control
a primera vista, control de conductor protector,
medición de resistencia de aislamiento,
medición de la corriente conductora, control
de funcionamiento).
Sheet 6
3. Como en todo producto de fabricación
industrial no puede ser excluido en general de
que se produzcan al usarlo elementos que
puedan generar alergias, los llamados
elementos alergénicos (por ejemplo el
níquel). Si se producieran en el trato con
productos R&S reacciones alérgicas, como
por ejemplo urticaria, estornudos frecuentes,
irritación de la conjuntiva o dificultades al
respirar, se deberá consultar inmediatamente
a un médico para averiguar los motivos de
estas reacciones.
4. Si productos / elementos de construcción son
tratados fuera del funcionamiento definido de
forma mecánica o térmica, pueden generarse
elementos peligrosos (polvos de sustancia de
metales pesados como por ejemplo plomo,
berilio, níquel). La partición elemental del
producto, como por ejemplo sucede en el
tratamiento de materias residuales, debe de
ser efectuada solamente por personal
especializado para estos tratamientos. La
partición elemental efectuada
inadecuadamente puede generar daños para
la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las
directivas nacionales referentes al tratamiento
de materias residuales.
5. En el caso de que se produjeran agentes de
peligro o combustibles en la aplicación del
producto que debieran de ser transferidos a
un tratamiento de materias residuales, como
por ejemplo agentes refrigerantes que deben
ser repuestos en periodos definidos, o aceites
para motores, deberán ser tenidas en cuenta
las prescripciones de seguridad del fabricante
de estos agentes de peligro o combustibles y
las regulaciones regionales para el tratamiento
de materias residuales. Cuiden también de
tener en cuenta en caso dado las
prescripciones de seguridad especiales en la
descripción del producto.
6. Ciertos productos, como por ejemplo las
instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF,
pueden a causa de su función natural, emitir
una radiación electromagnética aumentada.
En vista a la protección de la vida en
desarrollo deberían ser protegidas personas
embarazadas debidamente. También las
personas con un bypass pueden correr peligro
a causa de la radiación electromagnética.
1171.0000.42-04.00
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
El empresario/usuario está comprometido a
valorar y señalar áreas de trabajo en las que
se corra un riesgo aumentado de exposición a
radiaciones para evitar riesgos.
La utilización de los productos requiere
instrucciones especiales y una alta
concentración en el manejo. Debe de ponerse
por seguro de que las personas que manejen
los productos estén a la altura de los
requerimientos necesarios referente a sus
aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y emocionales, ya
que de otra manera no se pueden excluir
lesiones o daños de objetos. El empresario
lleva la responsabilidad de seleccionar el
personal usuario apto para el manejo de los
productos.
Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se
deberá tener por seguro de que la tensión
preseleccionada en el producto equivalga a la
del la red de distribución. Si es necesario
cambiar la preselección de la tensión también
se deberán en caso dabo cambiar los fusibles
correspondientes del producto.
Productos de la clase de seguridad I con
alimentación móvil y enchufe individual de
producto solamente deberán ser conectados
para el funcionamiento a tomas de corriente
de contacto de seguridad y con conductor
protector conectado.
Queda prohibida toda clase de interrupción
intencionada del conductor protector, tanto en
la toma de corriente como en el mismo
producto. Puede tener como consecuencia el
peligro de golpe de corriente por el producto.
Si se utilizaran cables o enchufes de
extensión se deberá poner al seguro que es
controlado su estado técnico de seguridad.
Si el producto no está equipado con un
interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, se
deberá considerar el enchufe del cable de
distribución como interruptor. En estos casos
deberá asegurar de que el enchufe sea de
fácil acceso y nabejo (según la medida del
cable de distribución, aproximadamente 2 m).
Los interruptores de función o electrónicos no
son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si
los productos sin interruptor están integrados
en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberá
instalar el interruptor al nivel de la instalación.
Sheet 7
12. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el
cable eléctrico. Compruebe regularmente el
correcto estado de los cables de conexión a
red. Asegure a través de las medidas de
protección y de instalación adecuadas de que
el cable de eléctrico no pueda ser dañado o
de que nadie pueda ser dañado por él, por
ejemplo al tropezar o por un golpe de
corriente.
13. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento
en redes de distribución TN/TT aseguradas
con fusibles de como máximo 16 A (utilización
de fusibles de mayor amperaje sólo previa
consulta con el grupo de empresas Rohde &
Schwarz).
14. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de
corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca
el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la
toma de corriente. Si no tiene en
consideración estas indicaciones se arriesga a
que se originen chispas, fuego y/o heridas.
15. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los
cables de extensión o los enchufes de
extensión ya que esto pudiera causar fuego o
golpes de corriente.
16. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente
con una tensión de entrada de Ueff > 30 V se
deberá tomar las precauciones debidas para
impedir cualquier peligro (por ejemplo medios
de medición adecuados, seguros, limitación
de tensión, corte protector, aislamiento etc.).
17. En caso de conexión con aparatos de la
técnica informática se deberá tener en cuenta
que estos cumplan los requisitos del estándar
IEC950/EN60950.
18. A menos que esté permitido expresamente, no
retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la
carcasa mientras el producto esté en servicio.
Esto pone a descubierto los cables y
componentes eléctricos y puede causar
heridas, fuego o daños en el producto.
19. Si un producto es instalado fijamente en un
lugar, se deberá primero conectar el conductor
protector fijo con el conductor protector del
aparato antes de hacer cualquier otra
conexión. La instalación y la conexión deberán
ser efectuadas por un electricista
especializado.
1171.0000.42-04.00
20. En caso de que los productos que son
instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin
protector implementado, autointerruptor o
similares objetos de protección, el circuito de
suministro de corriente deberá estar protegido
de manera que usuarios y productos estén
suficientemente protegidos.
21. Por favor, no introduzca ningún objeto que no
esté destinado a ello en los orificios de la caja
del aparato. No vierta nunca ninguna clase de
líquidos sobre o en la caja. Esto puede
producir cortocircuitos en el producto y/o
puede causar golpes de corriente, fuego o
heridas.
22. Asegúrese con la protección adecuada de que
no pueda originarse en el producto una
sobrecarga por ejemplo a causa de una
tormenta. Si no se verá el personal que lo
utilice expuesto al peligro de un golpe de
corriente.
23. Los productos R&S no están protegidos contra
líquidos si no es que exista otra indicación, ver
también punto 1. Si no se tiene en cuenta esto
se arriesga el peligro de golpe de corriente
para el usuario o de daños en el producto lo
cual también puede llevar al peligro de
personas.
24. No utilice el producto bajo condiciones en las
que pueda producirse y se hayan producido
líquidos de condensación en o dentro del
producto como por ejemplo cuando se
desplaza el producto de un lugar frío a un
lugar caliente.
25. Por favor no cierre ninguna ranura u orificio
del producto, ya que estas son necesarias
para la ventilación e impiden que el producto
se caliente demasiado. No pongan el producto
encima de materiales blandos como por
ejemplo sofás o alfombras o dentro de una
caja cerrada, si esta no está suficientemente
ventilada.
26. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que
produzcan calor, como por ejemplo radiadores
o calentadores. La temperatura ambiental no
debe superar la temperatura máxima
especificada en la hoja de datos.
Sheet 8
27. Baterías y acumuladores no deben de ser
expuestos a temperaturas altas o al fuego.
Guardar baterías y acumuladores fuera del
alcance de los niños. No cortocircuitar
baterías ni acumuladores. Si las baterías o los
acumuladores no son cambiados con la
debida atención existirá peligro de explosión
(atención células de litio). Cambiar las
baterías o los acumuladores solamente por los
del tipo R&S correspondiente (ver lista de
piezas de recambio). Las baterías y
acumuladores deben reutilizarse y no deben
acceder a los vertederos. Las baterías y
acumuladores que contienen plomo, mercurio
o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos
especiales. Respete en esta relación las
normas nacionales de evacuación y reciclaje.
28. Por favor tengan en cuenta que en caso de un
incendio pueden desprenderse del producto
agentes venenosos (gases, líquidos etc.) que
pueden generar daños a la salud.
29. El producto puede poseer un peso elevado.
Muévalo con cuidado para evitar lesiones en
la espalda u otras partes corporales.
30. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies,
vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus
características de peso o de estabilidad no
sean aptas para él. Siga siempre las
instrucciones de instalación del fabricante
cuando instale y asegure el producto en
objetos o estructuras (por ejemplo paredes y
estantes).
31. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven
solamente de ayuda para el manejo que
solamente está previsto para personas. Por
eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la
sujeción en o sobre medios de transporte
como por ejemplo grúas, carretillas elevadoras
1171.0000.42-04.00
de horquilla, carros etc. El usuario es
responsable de que los productos sean
sujetados de forma segura a los medios de
transporte y de que las prescripciones de
seguridad del fabricante de los medios de
transporte sean observadas. En caso de que
no se tengan en cuenta pueden causarse
daños en personas y objetos.
32. Si llega a utilizar el producto dentro de un
vehículo, queda en la responsabilidad
absoluta del conductor que conducir el
vehículo de manera segura. Asegure el
producto dentro del vehículo debidamente
para evitar en caso de un accidente las
lesiones u otra clase de daños. No utilice
nunca el producto dentro de un vehículo en
movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al
conductor. Siempre queda en la
responsabilidad absoluta del conductor la
seguridad del vehículo. El fabricante no
asumirá ninguna clase de responsabilidad por
accidentes o colisiones.
33. Dado el caso de que esté integrado un
producto de láser en un producto R&S (por
ejemplo CD/DVD-ROM) no utilice otras
instalaciones o funciones que las descritas en
la documentación de producto. De otra
manera pondrá en peligro su salud, ya que el
rayo láser puede dañar irreversiblemente sus
ojos. Nunca trate de descomponer estos
productos. Nunca mire dentro del rayo láser.
34. Antes de proceder a la limpieza, desconecte el
producto de la red. Realice la limpieza con un
paño suave, que no se deshilache. No utilice
de ninguna manera agentes limpiadores
químicos como, por ejemplo, alcohol, acetona
o nitrodiluyente.
Sheet 9
KONFORMITÄTSERKLÄRUNG gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG)
und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY in accordance with the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Act (FTEG) and Directive
1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)
Zertifikat-Nr.: / Certificate No.:
2003-19
Hiermit wird bescheinigt, dass die Funkanlage
This is to certify that the radio equipment
Gerätetyp / Equipment Type
Materialnummer / Stock No.
Benennung / Designation
XT4410A
XT4460A
XU4410A
XD4410A
XD4460A
6102.0307.xx
6102.1103.xx
6122.3801.xx
6122.1109.xx
6122.3601.xx
VHF/UHF Transceiver
VHF/UHF Transceiver
VHF Transceiver
UHF Transceiver
UHF Transceiver
Geräteklasse: / Equipment class:
2.12 – Infrastructure equipment
bei bestimmungsgemäßer Verwendung den grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und den übrigen
einschlägigen Bestimmungen des FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht.
complies with the essential requirements of §3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of the R&TTE
Directive), when used for its intended purpose.
•
Gesundheit und Sicherheit gemäß § 3 (1) 1 (Artikel 3 (1) a))
•
Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1 (Article 3(1) a))
•
Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf die elektromagn. Verträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))
•
•
•
•
•
Protection requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility § 3(1)(2), (Article 3(1)(b))
Maßnahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Funkfrequenzspektrums
Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum
Luftschnittstelle bei Funkanlagen gemäß § 3(2) (Artikel 3(2))
Air interface of the radio systems pursuant to § 3(2) (Article 3(2))
EN 60950-1:2001
EN 300339 V1.1.1 (1998-06)
ETSI EN 301489-1 V1.4.1 (2002-08)
ETSI EN 301489-22 V1.2.1 (2002-08)
Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:
Harmonized standards applied:
Einhaltung der grundlegenden Anforderungen auf andere Art und
Weise (hierzu verwendete Standards/Spezifikationen):
Other means of proving conformity with the essential requirements
(standards/specifications used):
EN 300676 V1.3.1 (2003-03)
RegTP 321 ZV 039
RegTP SSB FL 004 (2001-09)
Rec. 1999/519/EG; 26. BImSchV
Anbringung des CE-Zeichens ab: 2003 / Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2003
München, den 12. Dezember 2005
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München
Zentrales Qualitätsmanagement MF-QZ / Radde
Munich, 2005-12-12
Central Quality Management
6102.0307.01
CE
D/E-3
Radio Communication Systems Division
Documentation Dept.
Mühldorfstr. 15
D-81671 München
Fax +49 89 4129 12690
EVALUATION OF MANUALS
here:
Operating Manual, Id. No. 6125.1651.12.02, R&S M3SR Transceivers
Dear Sirs,
we constantly try to improve our technical manuals, so that you, our customer gets the
best possible benefit from them.
In order to become better, we need your help and your opinion on the manuals. Therefore, we would like you to evaluate the accompanying manual and tell us your opinion
about it. In order to make the job easy for you, we have designed the following matrix.
Please tick where appropriate.
1.
What is your general impression of the manual?
lousy
2.
not so good
quite ok
good
excellent
How do you assess the detail and depth of information in general?
far too
detailed
3.
too much
information
all information
contained
not enough
information
important items
missing
How do you assess the size of the manual in general?
far too
bulky
4.
a bit too
thick
appropriate to
the equipment
easy to
handle
very clearly
presented
How do you assess the structure of the manual?
opaque
5.
difficult to
understand
quite ok
easy to find
information
very userfriendly
How do you assess the understandability (language) of manual?
very difficult
to follow
0708
complicated
language
normal to
understand
easy to
understand
6125.1651.12.02 - 001
very userfriendly
please turn over
E V A L U A T I O N O F M A N U A L S Bilaga 1 till TO AF SAMBAND 100 017307
Operating Manual, Id. No. 6125.1651.12.02, R&S M3SR Transceivers
6.
How do you rate the number of illustrations?
far too
many
7.
just about
right
could be
more
not enough
illustrations
good
excellent
How do you rate the quality of illustrations?
lousy
8.
a bit too
many
not so good
quite ok
How do you assess the balance of text to illustrations?
lousy
not so good
quite ok
good
excellent
Further Comments and Suggestions for Improvement:
Date / Signature / Department
0708
6125.1651.12.02 - 002
Notices
R&S M3SR Transceivers
Definitions
Check
Discolouration
Disconnect
Examine
Functional check
Hazardous voltages
Make sure
Open
Perfect condition
Replacement
Replace
Visual examination
In appropriate measurements by means of the specified test
equipment, proper functioning of a unit or module is established.
Components such as connectors and printed circuit boards are
examined if they have changed colour due to temperature effects and thus differ widely from their normal condition.
Pull off connector.
In case of trouble the unit / module or components such as e.g.
connectors, are to be thoroughly checked for obvious mechanical damage.
This means that components / modules / units are checked for
proper functioning while installed.
Voltages > 30 Vrms or 50 Vpp (AC) or 50 V (DC)
Ascertain whether all mentioned requirements are met or all
measures are taken to establish the required condition.
Access is to be gained to the unit / module by observing the
given instructions and safety precautions.
This means that a component / module / unit has to be in a
state which does not give cause to complaints.
In case of trouble the replacement of modules is carried out in
order to localize and eliminate the fault.
Components / modules / units which - due to damage and / or
other defects - no longer meet the respective requirements or
components / modules / units which during troubleshooting
were identified as the cause of fault, are to be replaced.
This is a visual inspection of the outer appearance and completeness of a component / module / unit without manual interference by the examiner. This does not include the necessary
preparations and finishing work such as opening and closing of
covers or similar.
N.1
6125.1651.12.01
Notices
Notices
The three different notices used in this documentation have the following meaning:
WARNING
This heading is used to indicate that inaccurate observance or nonobservance of instructions or methods can cause injury or even fatal accidents or during an operation
described hazardous material can be set free in the unit or system.
CAUTION
This heading is used to indicate that inaccurate observance or nonobservance of instructions
or methods can cause damage to the unit.
Note:
This heading is used to draw the reader’s attention to a particular fact.
6125.1651.12.01
N.2
Notices
User Information
Purpose of the Manual
This Manual provides all information the operators and service staff need to maintain level 1 of repairs.
lt contains all necessary information and instructions concerning the installation, putting into operation
and control of the unit, plus troubleshooting instructions down to unit level. In case of trouble this allows
straightforward error localization as well as easy replacement of the unit.
We recommend to keep complete spare units in store.
Measuring Units
In this Manual the basic SI measuring units and units coherently derived from them are used by preference. In exceptional cases units legally derived from the SI units acc. to DIN1301 may also be used.
N.3
6125.1651.12.01
6125.1651.12.01
Notices
N.4
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviations
A
ampere
AC
alternating current
ACK
acknowledge
AF
audio frequency
AFI
audio frequency interface
AGC
automatic gain control
ALC
automatic level control
AM
amplitude modulation
AMBE
advanced multiband excitation
async
asynchronous
ATC
air traffic control
AUDIO
R&S designator for audio connector
AUX
auxiliary
BAT
battery
BI
break-in
BIT
built-in test
C
control unit
CARR
carrier
CBIT
continuous built-in test
CFT
conferencing tone (detection)
Ch
channel
CLR
clear
cm
centimetre
Codec
coder/decoder
COMSEC
communication security
Com Mode
communication mode
CP
control panel
iii
6125.1651.12.02
CRD
crypto receive detect
CTRL
control
CU
control unit
CVSD
continuously variable slope delta modulation
dB
decibel
DB
data base
dBm
decibel, absolute level, relative to 1 mW
DC
direct current
DEV
device
DIN
Deutsche Industrienorm
DPP
data preprocessor
DTE
data terminal equipment
EMC
electromagnetic compatibility
EMCL
emergency clear
Emgcy
emergency
ENT
enter
EPM
electronic protection measures
ESC
escape
F
frequency
FEC
forward error correction
FILL
fill gun
FM
frequency modulation
FS
frequency set
FSK
frequency shift keying
FW
firmware
G
guard receiver
GB2PP
GB2 platform protocol
GND
ground
6125.1651.12.02
iv
GPS
global positioning system
GRP
group
GUI
graphical user interface
HAIL
hailing
HDR
high data rate
HPP
hardware protection processor
HW
hardware
HWM
hardware module
Hz
Hertz
IBIT
initiated built-in test
IC
integrated circuit
ID
identification
IF
intermediate frequency
IMP
impedance
IN
input
I/O
input/output
IP
Internet Protocol
kB
kilobit
kHz
kiloHertz
LAN
local area network
LED
light-emitting diode
LEV
level
LO
local oscillator
m
metre
4F
multiband, multimode and multirole surface radio
MAINT
maintenance
MGMT
management
v
6125.1651.12.02
MHz
megahertz
min
minimum
mm
millimetre
MMI
man-machine interface
Mod
model
MOD
modulation
ms
millisecond
MTBF
mean time between failures
MTTR
mean time to repair
mW
milliwatt
N
Newton
NB
narrowband
OCXO
oven-controlled crystal oscillator
PA
power amplifier
PARAMS
parameter
PBIT
power-on built-in test
PC
personal computer
PIN
personal identification number
PLL
phase-locked loop
PP
protection processor
PTT
push to talk
POR
plain override
PWR
power
QoS
quality of service
R
radio
R&S®
Rohde & Schwarz
RAL
Reichs-Ausschuss für Lieferbedingungen
6125.1651.12.02
vi
RCB
radio control bus
RDB
radio data bus
REF
reference
RF
radio frequency
RMB
radio module bus
RS 232
serial interface standard
RSSI
received signal strength indicator
RX, Rx
receive, receiver
S/N
signal-to-noise ratio
sec
second
SECOS
secure EPM communication system
SER
serial
SQL
squelch
SQLG
squelch, guard receiver
SQLM
squelch, main receiver
SRC
source
SUP
supply
SW
software
SWM
software module
sync
synchronous
TCP
transmission control protocol
TCXO
temperature-compensated crystal oscillator
TDMA
time division multiple access
TOD
time of day
TRANSEC
transmission security
TRU
time reference unit (menu step on MMI)
TX, Tx
transmit, transmitter
UHF
ultra high frequency
vii
6125.1651.12.02
VAC
volts alternating current
VCXO
voltage-controlled oscillator
VDC
volts direct current
VDE
Verband Deutscher Elektroingenieure
VHF
very high frequency
Vocoder
voice decoder
VoD
voice over data
VSWR
voltage-standing wave ratio
W
watts
WB
wideband
X
R&S designator for connectors, e.g. X1
XD
UHF transceiver
XT
UHF/VHF transceiver
6125.1651.12.02
viii
Overview
Chapter
1
User Information
General Features, Explanation of Models, Required Personnel, Required Power
Supply, Design, Functioning, General Data
2
Preparation for Use
Unpacking and Checking, Installation, Basic Cabling, Switching the Transceiver
On and Off
3
Operation
Overview, Basic Operating Concepts, Operation, Scenarios (Guard Signal Reception, Fill Gun), Waveforms (Fixed Frequency, Special Modes, Preset Scan,
Emergency Operation), Maintenance
4
Malfunctions
Visual Inspection
5
Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance, Taking Care, Cleaning, Paintwork
A1
Technical Information
Technical Data, External Interfaces, Remote Control
A2
Drawings
ix
6125.1651.12.02
6125.1651.12.02
Overview
x
Contents
1
User Information...............................................................................................1.1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
General Features ...........................................................................................................1.2
Explanation of Models ....................................................................................................1.4
Required Personnel........................................................................................................1.5
Required Power Supply..................................................................................................1.5
Design, e.g. R&S XT 4410A, Mod. 22............................................................................1.6
Functioning, e.g. R&S XT 4410A, Mod. 22 ....................................................................1.8
General Data ................................................................................................................1.10
Recommended Accessories.........................................................................................1.10
2
Preparation for Use ..........................................................................................2.1
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.2.1
2.3.2.2
2.4
2.5
R&S M3SR - Unpacking.................................................................................................2.1
R&S M3SR - Installation.................................................................................................2.2
R&S M3SR - Connect Procedures .................................................................................2.4
Basic Connection ...........................................................................................................2.5
Connection of Peripheral Equipment..............................................................................2.7
Filters..............................................................................................................................2.7
Power Amplifiers ..........................................................................................................2.12
R&S M3SR - Power Up ................................................................................................2.18
R&S M3SR - Power Down ...........................................................................................2.20
3
Operation...........................................................................................................3.1
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.2.1
3.2.2.2
3.2.2.3
3.2.2.4
3.2.2.4.1
3.2.2.4.2
3.2.2.5
3.2.2.5.1
3.2.2.5.2
3.2.2.5.3
3.2.2.5.4
3.2.2.5.5
3.2.2.6
3.2.2.7
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.1.1
3.3.1.2
3.3.2
3.3.2.1
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.4.1
3.3.4.2
Overview ........................................................................................................................3.1
Basic Operating Concepts..............................................................................................3.4
Radio Settings/Displays via Front Panel ........................................................................3.4
Operation via Control Unit ..............................................................................................3.7
Graphical User Interface Design ....................................................................................3.8
Softkeys........................................................................................................................3.10
Control Unit LEDs.........................................................................................................3.11
Menu Page Design.......................................................................................................3.11
Header..........................................................................................................................3.12
Central Area .................................................................................................................3.15
Control Elements..........................................................................................................3.18
Navigation ....................................................................................................................3.18
Settings ........................................................................................................................3.18
Greyed-out Softkey Labels...........................................................................................3.19
Inactive Data Elements ................................................................................................3.19
Context Menu ...............................................................................................................3.20
Screen Saver................................................................................................................3.22
Suspend Mode .............................................................................................................3.22
Operation......................................................................................................................3.23
Operating / Maintenance Mode ....................................................................................3.23
Operating Mode............................................................................................................3.23
Maintenance Mode.......................................................................................................3.29
Manual Mode / Preset Mode ........................................................................................3.32
Manual Mode................................................................................................................3.32
Preset Mode .................................................................................................................3.34
Local / Remote Mode ...................................................................................................3.38
Local Mode...................................................................................................................3.39
Remote Mode...............................................................................................................3.41
1
6125.1651.12.02
Contents
3.3.4.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.1.1
3.5.1.2
3.5.1.3
3.5.2
3.5.2.1
3.5.2.1.1
3.5.2.1.2
3.5.2.1.3
3.5.2.2
3.5.2.2.1
3.5.2.2.2
3.5.2.2.3
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.4.1
3.5.4.2
3.5.4.3
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.1.1
3.6.1.1.1
3.6.1.1.2
3.6.1.1.3
3.6.1.2
3.6.2
3.6.2.1
3.6.2.2
3.6.3
3.6.3.1
3.6.3.2
3.6.3.3
3.6.3.3.1
3.6.3.3.2
3.6.3.3.3
3.6.3.3.4
3.6.3.3.5
3.6.3.3.5.1
3.6.3.3.5.2
3.6.3.3.6
3.6.3.3.7
3.6.3.3.8
3.6.3.4
3.6.3.5
3.6.3.6
3.6.3.7
Control Unit / Radio Connection...................................................................................3.42
Scenarios .....................................................................................................................3.45
Guard Signal Reception ...............................................................................................3.45
Fill Gun (Fixed Frequency)...........................................................................................3.46
Waveforms ...................................................................................................................3.48
Fixed Frequency...........................................................................................................3.48
Functions......................................................................................................................3.48
Manual Mode................................................................................................................3.51
Preset Mode .................................................................................................................3.53
Special Modes..............................................................................................................3.54
Link11 / LinkY...............................................................................................................3.57
Introduction...................................................................................................................3.57
Manual Mode................................................................................................................3.59
Preset Mode .................................................................................................................3.59
High Data Rate.............................................................................................................3.60
Introduction...................................................................................................................3.60
Manual Mode................................................................................................................3.62
Preset Mode .................................................................................................................3.62
Emergency Operation ..................................................................................................3.63
Preset Scan Mode........................................................................................................3.65
Introduction...................................................................................................................3.65
Activating Preset Scan .................................................................................................3.67
Limitations of Preset Scan............................................................................................3.71
Maintenance.................................................................................................................3.72
Control Unit and Radio .................................................................................................3.72
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................3.72
PBIT .............................................................................................................................3.72
CBIT .............................................................................................................................3.72
IBIT...............................................................................................................................3.74
Error List.......................................................................................................................3.76
Configuration and Status..............................................................................................3.78
Inventory.......................................................................................................................3.78
Address Configuration..................................................................................................3.80
Radio ............................................................................................................................3.84
Radio Time and Date ...................................................................................................3.84
Default Setting..............................................................................................................3.85
Radio Modules .............................................................................................................3.91
Synthesizer...................................................................................................................3.91
Receiver .......................................................................................................................3.92
Guard Receiver ............................................................................................................3.93
Protection Processor (if installed).................................................................................3.94
Power Amplifier ............................................................................................................3.95
Configuration of Power Amplifier..................................................................................3.95
Configuration of Filter ...................................................................................................3.98
Platform ........................................................................................................................3.99
Audio Interface ...........................................................................................................3.100
Up/Down Converter R&S UX 4401 ............................................................................3.102
Option Management...................................................................................................3.103
Resource Management ..............................................................................................3.104
Audio Monitoring ........................................................................................................3.109
I/O Mapping................................................................................................................3.110
2
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.3.8
3.6.3.9
3.6.3.10
3.6.3.10.1
3.6.4
3.6.4.1
3.6.4.2
3.6.4.3
Contents
Protocol Configuration................................................................................................3.112
PTT Timeout Configuration ........................................................................................3.113
Preset Configuration...................................................................................................3.115
Preset Settings ...........................................................................................................3.115
Control Unit ................................................................................................................3.120
MMI Parameters.........................................................................................................3.120
Default Settings ..........................................................................................................3.122
Test of Key Functions.................................................................................................3.123
4
Malfunctions .....................................................................................................4.1
4.1
Visual Inspection ............................................................................................................4.1
5
Maintenance......................................................................................................5.1
5.1
5.1.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
Scheduled Maintenance.................................................................................................5.1
Calibration ......................................................................................................................5.4
Care, Cleaning ...............................................................................................................5.7
Care................................................................................................................................5.7
Cleaning .........................................................................................................................5.8
Retouching the Paint Work.............................................................................................5.9
A1
Technical Information ................................................................................... A1.1
A1.1
A1.2
A1.3
Technical Data ............................................................................................................ A1.1
External Interfaces ...................................................................................................... A1.2
Remote Control ........................................................................................................... A1.3
A2
Drawings ........................................................................................................ A2.1
6125.1651.12.02
3
Figures
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2
Fig. 1.3
Fig. 1.4
Fig. 2.1
Fig. 2.2
Fig. 2.3
Fig. 2.4
Fig. 2.5
Fig. 2.6
Fig. 2.7
Fig. 2.8
Fig. 2.9
Fig. 2.10
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2
Fig. 3.3
Fig. 3.4
Fig. 3.5
Fig. 3.6
Fig. 3.7
Fig. 3.8
Fig. 3.9
Fig. 3.10
Fig. 3.11
Fig. 3.12
Fig. 3.13
Fig. 3.14
Fig. 3.15
Fig. 3.16
Fig. 3.17
Fig. 3.18
Fig. 3.19
Fig. 3.20
Fig. 3.21
Fig. 3.22
Fig. 3.23
Fig. 3.24
Fig. 3.25
Fig. 3.26
Fig. 3.27
Fig. 3.28
Fig. 3.29
Fig. 3.30
Fig. 3.31
Fig. 3.32
Fig. 3.33
Fig. 3.34
R&S M3SR Transceiver, Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2
Power Supply R&S IN 4000A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5
Top View of e.g. R&S XT 4410A, Mod. 22 (without Cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7
Block Diagram of e.g. R&S XT 4410A, Mod. 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.9
Installation into a 19" Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3
Rear Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5
Front Cabling, e.g. R&S XT 4410A (Ruggedized) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6
Wiring Diagram R&S M3SR Transceiver - e.g. R&S FD 221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.10
Wiring Diagram R&S M3SR Transceiver - e.g. R&S FD 213A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.11
Wiring Diagram R&S M3SR Transceiver - R&S VD 480L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.14
Wiring Diagram R&S M3SR Transceiver - R&S VU 220L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.15
Wiring Diagram R&S M3SR Transceiver - e.g. R&S FD 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17
Switching the Transceiver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18
Switching the Transceiver Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.20
R&S M3SR Radios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2
Example of a Network Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3
Radio Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4
Control Unit Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7
Extract of Menu Structure, Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9
Location of Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10
Menu Page Design with Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.11
Header Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.12
Example: Fixed Frequency Central Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.15
Example: Fixed Frequency Central Area - CBIT Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.16
Example - Folder View of Radio Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.17
Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.20
Context Menu - Fixed Frequency Preset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.21
Example of Remote Access with Fixed Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.23
Access Rights - All Control Units in Monitoring Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.25
Access Rights - Concurrent Access Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.26
Access Rights - Fixed Access Rights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.27
Access Rights - Rejected Access Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.28
Maintenance - Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.29
Radio Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.30
Maintenance - Supervisor Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.31
Main Menu - Example of Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.32
Preset Organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.35
Main Menu - Loading a Preset Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.36
Main Menu - Preset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.37
Overview - Local and Remote Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.38
Access Rights in Local Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.39
Remote Control Unit - Lost Connection because of Local Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.40
Example of a Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.41
Selecting a Radio to be Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.42
Successful Connection to a Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.44
Example of Emergency Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.45
Radio - Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.46
Example of Radio in Load Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.47
4
6125.1651.12.02
Fig. 3.35
Fig. 3.36
Fig. 3.37
Fig. 3.38
Fig. 3.39
Fig. 3.40
Fig. 3.41
Fig. 3.42
Fig. 3.43
Fig. 3.44
Fig. 3.45
Fig. 3.46
Fig. 3.47
Fig. 3.48
Fig. 3.49
Fig. 3.50
Fig. 3.51
Fig. 3.52
Fig. 3.53
Fig. 3.54
Fig. 3.55
Fig. 3.56
Fig. 3.57
Fig. 3.58
Fig. 3.59
Fig. 3.60
Fig. 3.61
Fig. 3.62
Fig. 3.63
Fig. 3.64
Fig. 3.65
Fig. 3.66
Fig. 3.67
Fig. 3.68
Fig. 3.69
Fig. 3.70
Fig. 3.71
Fig. 3.72
Fig. 3.73
Fig. 3.74
Fig. 3.75
Fig. 3.76
Fig. 3.77
Fig. 3.78
Fig. 3.79
Fig. 3.80
Fig. 3.81
Fig. 3.82
Fig. 3.83
Fig. 3.84
Fig. 3.85
Figures
Example - Selecting a Communication Mode in Fixed Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.49
Fixed Frequency, Main Menu, page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.51
Fixed Frequency, Main Menu, page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.52
Example - Fixed Frequency in Preset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.53
Selection of Special Modes Menu from the Main Menu (Manual Mode) . . . . . . . . . . .3.54
Special Mode Menu (Manual Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.55
Selection of a Special Mode from the Main Menu (Preset Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.56
Connection of Link11 / LinkY Terminal to R&S M3SR Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.58
Link11 / LinkY Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.59
Connection of an External HDR Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.61
High Data Rate Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.62
Example - Emergency Mode in Preset Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.63
Example - Emergency Mode in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.64
Main Menu - Example of Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.67
Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.68
Preset Scan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.69
Running Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.70
Stopped Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.70
Examples of CBIT Error List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.73
Examples of IBIT Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.75
Example of Radio Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.76
Example of Radio Error Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.77
Example of Radio Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.78
Example of Radio Inventory Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.79
Example of IP Network Configuration for a Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.80
Example of IP Address list of a Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.81
Example of 2 Connected Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.82
Setting the Radio Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.84
Restoring the Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.85
Example of Module Synthesizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.91
Example of Module Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.92
Example of Module Guard Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.93
Example of Module Protection Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.94
Example of Module Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.96
Example of Module Power Amplifier Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.97
Example of Module Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.99
Example of Module Audio Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.100
Example of Radio Modules CODEC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.101
Example of Radio Modules ALC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.101
Example of Up/Down Converter R&S UX 4401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.102
Example of Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.103
Example of Resource Management for Wideband Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.105
Resource Management - Configuring the Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.107
Resource Management - Audio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.108
Audio Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.109
I/O Mapping Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.110
Protocol Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.112
PTT Timeout Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.113
Example of Preset Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.115
Preset Page - General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.116
Preset Page - Fixed Frequency Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.117
6125.1651.12.02
5
Figures
Fig. 3.86
Fig. 3.87
Fig. 3.88
Fig. 3.89
Fig. 3.90
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.4
Preset Page - Link 11/Y Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.118
Preset Page - High Data Rate Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.119
Setting the Date Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.120
Setting the MMI Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.121
Test of Key Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.123
Label: Date of Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1
Removing the Cover of the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2
Removing the Cover of the Front Panel, Ruggedized Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2
Test Setup for Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.6
6
6125.1651.12.02
Tables
Tables
Tab. 2.1
Tab. 2.2
Tab. 2.3
Tab. 2.4
Tab. 3.1
Tab. 3.2
Tab. 3.3
Tab. 3.4
Tab. 3.5
Tab. 3.6
Tab. 3.7
Tab. 3.8
Tab. 5.1
Tab. 5.2
Tab. 5.3
Overview: Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Valid Radio Operation and Communication Modes for Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Overview: Power Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Valid Radio Operation and Communication Modes for Power Amplifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Dependency between LEDs (1 to 4) and the Audible AF Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Fixed Frequency Manual Mode — Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Fixed Frequency Preset Mode — Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.85
Assignments in Resource Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.104
Functions Related to the Application (Rx, RxTx, Tx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.106
Fixed Frequency Mode — Preset Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.117
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.122
List of Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Values for TCXO/OCXO Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
List of Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
7
6125.1651.12.02
Tables
8
6125.1651.12.02
Index
Index
A
Access Rights
........................................................................................... 3.13, 3.29
Access Rights in Operating Mode
...................................................................... 3.23
Activate Button
................................................................................................... 3.19
Activating Preset Scan
....................................................................................... 3.67
Add Preset
....................................................................................................... 3.116
Additional Options and Modules
.......................................................................... 3.1
Address Configuration
....................................................................................... 3.80
Advanced Access
.............................................................................................. 3.24
Assignments in the Resource Management
.................................................... 3.104
Audio Interface
................................................................................................... 3.98
Audio Monitoring
.............................................................................................. 3.109
Automatic Gain Control
...................................................................................... 3.50
B
Backup Battery
..................................................................................................... 5.1
Basic Connection - Front Side
............................................................................. 2.7
Basic Connection - Rear Side
.............................................................................. 2.6
Basic Operation Concepts
................................................................................... 3.4
Basic Settings
...................................................................................................... 2.1
Block Diagram
...................................................................................................... 1.9
C
Care
..................................................................................................................... 5.7
CBIT
................................................................................................................... 3.72
CBIT Message for PTT Timeout
...................................................................... 3.114
Central Area
....................................................................................................... 3.15
Channel Spacing
................................................................................................ 3.50
Check
................................................................................................................... 4.1
Cleaning
............................................................................................................... 5.8
Clipper
................................................................................................................ 3.50
Communication Modes
...................................................................................... 3.48
Compatibility
.................................................................................................... 3.112
Configuration (Filters)
........................................................................................ 2.10
Configuration (Power Amplifiers)
....................................................................... 2.14
Configuration and Status
................................................................................... 3.78
Configuration Menus
.......................................................................................... 3.17
Connected
.......................................................................................................... 3.42
Connecting
......................................................................................................... 3.42
Connection of Filters
............................................................................................ 2.7
Connection of Peripheral Equipment
................................................................... 2.7
Connection of Power Amplifiers
......................................................................... 2.12
Connection Procedures
....................................................................................... 2.4
Connection Status
.............................................................................................. 3.13
Context Menu
..................................................................................................... 3.20
Control Elements
............................................................................................... 3.18
I.1
6125.1651.12.02
Index
Control Unit
.......................................................................................................... 1.6
Control Unit / Radio Connection
........................................................................ 3.42
Control Unit LEDs
.............................................................................................. 3.11
D
Data Sheet
......................................................................................................... A2.1
Default Setting
................................................................................................... 3.85
AFI
.................................................................................................................. 3.89
Emergency
........................................................................................................ 3.86
Fixed Frequency
................................................................................................ 3.85
Guard Receiver
.................................................................................................. 3.90
High Data Rate
.................................................................................................. 3.86
HPP
................................................................................................................. 3.90
I/O Mapping
...................................................................................................... 3.90
Link11/Y
........................................................................................................... 3.86
Protocol Configuration
......................................................................................... 3.90
Radio Modes
..................................................................................................... 3.85
Radio Platform
................................................................................................... 3.89
Receiver
........................................................................................................... 3.87
Resource Management
........................................................................................ 3.86
Transmitter
........................................................................................................ 3.88
UP/Down Converter
............................................................................................ 3.90
Delete Preset or Delete All Presets
................................................................. 3.116
Dependency between LEDs (1 to 4) and the Audible AF Signal
......................... 3.5
Design
.................................................................................................................. 1.6
Disconnected
..................................................................................................... 3.43
Display and Control Elements
............................................................................ A2.1
Domain Selector
.............................................................................................. 3.116
DS 4400A
............................................................................................................. 1.8
Dust Protection Filter Mats
................................................................................... 5.2
E
Edit Preset Parameters
.................................................................................... 3.116
Editor
.................................................................................................................. 3.19
Elapsed Time
..................................................................................................... 3.84
Emergency Operation
........................................................................................ 3.63
Error List
................................................................................................... 3.73, A2.1
ET 4400
............................................................................................................... 1.6
Explanation of Models
.......................................................................................... 1.4
External Interfaces
............................................................................................. A2.1
F
FD 4430
............................................................................................................... 1.6
Fill Gun
............................................................................................................... 3.46
Filter
................................................................................................................... 3.98
Filters (Overview)
................................................................................................. 2.7
Fixed Access
...................................................................................................... 3.24
Fixed Frequency
................................................................................................ 3.48
Fixed Frequency in Preset Mode
....................................................................... 3.53
Fixed Frequency Main Menu, page 1
................................................................ 3.51
Fixed Frequency Main Menu, page 2
................................................................ 3.52
Fixed Frequency Manual Mode - Settings
......................................................... 3.52
6125.1651.12.02
I.2
Index
Fixed Frequency Preset Mode - Settings
........................................................... 3.53
Fixed Frequency Preset Parameters
............................................................... 3.117
Folder FIXED FREQUENCY
............................................................................ 3.117
Folder GENERAL
............................................................................................. 3.116
Folder HIGH DATA RATE
................................................................................ 3.119
Folder LINK11/Y
.............................................................................................. 3.118
Frequency
.......................................................................................................... 3.49
Frequency Ranges of Basic Units
........................................................................ 3.1
Front Cabling
....................................................................................................... 2.5
Front View
............................................................................................................ 1.2
Functioning
.......................................................................................................... 1.8
G
Gateway Address
............................................................................................... 3.80
GB 4000C
............................................................................................................ 1.6
General Benefits
.................................................................................................. 1.3
General Features
................................................................................................. 1.2
GF 4400T
............................................................................................................. 1.6
GH 4450
............................................................................................................... 1.6
Graphical User Interface Design
.......................................................................... 3.8
Greyed-out Softkey Labels
................................................................................ 3.19
Guard Receiver
.................................................................................................. 3.93
Guard Signal Reception
..................................................................................... 3.45
H
Half Duplex Mode
.............................................................................................. 3.50
Header
............................................................................................................... 3.12
High Data Rate
.................................................................................................. 3.60
I
I/O Mapping
..................................................................................................... 3.110
IBIT
.................................................................................................................... 3.74
Indication of Different Menu Icons
..................................................................... 3.14
Indication of Manual or Preset Mode
................................................................. 3.13
Installation
............................................................................................................ 2.2
Installation into 19" Rack
...................................................................................... 2.2
Installation into a 19" Rack
................................................................................... 2.3
Interface Description
.......................................................................................... A2.1
Interface Module
.................................................................................................. 1.6
Inventory
............................................................................................................ 3.78
K
KR 4000
............................................................................................................... 1.6
L
Limitations of Preset Scan
................................................................................. 3.71
Link11 / LinkY
.................................................................................................... 3.57
List of Materials
.................................................................................................... 5.7
Listbox Softkey
................................................................................................... 3.18
Local / Remote Application
.................................................................................. 3.1
local / remote mode
........................................................................................... 3.32
I.3
6125.1651.12.02
Index
Local or Remote Mode
....................................................................................... 3.13
Logical Address
................................................................................................. 3.80
M
Maintenance
...................................................................................................... 3.72
Maintenance Mode
............................................................................................ 3.29
Manual
............................................................................................................... 3.51
Manual Mode
............................................................................................ 3.32, 3.51
Manual Mode / Preset Mode
.............................................................................. 3.32
Marker Tone
....................................................................................................... 3.50
Menu
.................................................................................................................. A2.1
Menu 0000 Main Menu - Fixed Frequency in Preset Mode
............................... 3.53
Menu 0500 Preset Scan
.................................................................................... 3.67
Menu 1110 Radio IBIT Results
.......................................................................... 3.75
Menu 1115 Radio CBIT Results
........................................................................ 3.73
Menu 1120 Radio Error List
............................................................................... 3.76
Menu 1121 Radio Error Details
.......................................................................... 3.77
Menu 1125 Radio Inventory
............................................................................... 3.78
Menu 1126 Radio Inventory Details
................................................................... 3.79
Menu 1130 IO Mapping
................................................................................... 3.110
Menu 1140 Audio Monitoring
........................................................................... 3.109
Menu 1145 Resource Management - Wideband Analog
................................. 3.105
Menu 1146 Resouce Management Serial IF
................................................... 3.107
Menu 1146 Resouce Mgmt Audio Config
........................................................ 3.108
Menu 1150 Radio Modules - Audio Interface
................................................... 3.100
Menu 1150 Radio Modules - Guard Receiver
.................................................... 3.93
Menu 1150 Radio Modules - Plattform
............................................................ 3.101
Menu 1150 Radio Modules - Power Amplifier
.................................................... 3.96
Menu 1150 Radio Modules - Protection Processor
........................................... 3.94
Menu 1150 Radio Modules - Receiver
............................................................... 3.92
Menu 1150 Radio Modules - Synthesizer
.......................................................... 3.91
Menu 1150 Radio Modules - Up/Down Converter
........................................... 3.102
Menu 1151 Radio Modules PA Config
............................................................... 3.97
Menu 1152 Radio Modules Codec Calibration
................................................ 3.101
Menu 1153 Radio Modules ALC Config
........................................................... 3.101
Menu 1170 Radio Time
...................................................................................... 3.84
Menu 1175 Radio Options
............................................................................... 3.103
Menu 1190 PTT Configuration
......................................................................... 3.115
Menu 1195 Protocol Configuration
.................................................................. 3.112
Menu 1200 Preset Configuration
..................................................................... 3.115
Menu 1210 Preset Edit - Fixed Frequency
...................................................... 3.117
Menu 1210 Preset Edit - General
.................................................................... 3.116
Menu 1210 Preset Edit - High Data Rate
......................................................... 3.119
Menu 1210 Preset Edit - Link11/Y
................................................................... 3.118
Menu 1300 Control Unit Maintenance
............................................................. 3.120
Menu 1330 Control Unit Address List - IP Network Config
....................... 3.80, 3.81
Menu 1340 Control Unit MMI Parameters
....................................................... 3.120
Menu 3000 Emergency Mode
.................................................................. 3.45., 3.64
6125.1651.12.02
I.4
Index
Menu 4000 Fixed Frequency - Page 1
............................................................... 3.51
Menu 4000 Fixed Frequency - Page 2
............................................................... 3.52
Menu 7000 Special Modes
................................................................................ 3.54
Menu 7100 Link11/Y
.......................................................................................... 3.59
Menu 7300 High Data Rate
............................................................................... 3.62
Menu 9000 Context Menu
.................................................................................. 3.20
Menu 9000 Context Menu - Fixed Frequency Preset Mode
.............................. 3.21
Menu Page Design
............................................................................................ 3.11
MMI Parameters
.............................................................................................. 3.120
Modularity
............................................................................................................ 3.1
Modulation
......................................................................................................... 3.49
Monitoring Access
.............................................................................................. 3.23
N
Navigation
.......................................................................................................... 3.18
Network Topology
................................................................................................ 3.3
O
Offline or Online Status of the Radio
................................................................. 3.13
Operating Mode
................................................................................................. 3.23
Operation via Control Unit
.................................................................................... 3.7
Operational Menus
............................................................................................. 3.15
Option Management
........................................................................................ 3.103
Overview
.............................................................................................................. 3.1
Overview (Filters)
................................................................................................. 2.7
Own IP Address
................................................................................................. 3.79
P
Parts Lists
.......................................................................................................... A2.1
PBIT
................................................................................................................... 3.72
Platform
.............................................................................................................. 3.99
Power Amplifier
.................................................................................................. 3.95
Power Amplifiers (Overview)
.............................................................................. 2.12
Power Down
....................................................................................................... 2.20
Power Up
........................................................................................................... 2.18
Preset Configuration
........................................................................................ 3.115
Preset Mode
.............................................................................................. 3.34, 3.53
Preset Scan Mode
............................................................................................. 3.65
Preset Settings
................................................................................................. 3.115
Protection Processor
.......................................................................................... 3.94
..................................................................................... 3.112
PTT Mapping Order
......................................................................................... 3.112
PTT Timeout Off
.............................................................................................. 3.114
PTT Timeout On
.............................................................................................. 3.114
Pushbutton
......................................................................................................... 3.19
R
Radio Basis
.......................................................................................................... 1.6
Radio Modules
................................................................................................... 3.91
Radio Settings
...................................................................................................... 3.5
I.5
6125.1651.12.02
Index
Radio Settings / Displays via Front Panel
............................................................ 3.4
Radio Time
......................................................................................................... 3.84
Readjust the Oscillators
....................................................................................... 5.1
Rear Cabling
........................................................................................................ 2.5
Receive Mode
...................................................................................................... 1.8
Receiver
...................................................................................................... 1.6, 3.92
Reconfiguration while PTT is active
................................................................. 3.114
Required Personnel
............................................................................................. 1.5
Required Power Supply
....................................................................................... 1.5
Resource Management
.................................................................................... 3.104
S
Scenarios
........................................................................................................... 3.45
Scheduled Maintenance
...................................................................................... 5.1
Screen Saver
..................................................................................................... 3.22
Setting the Signals on the Loudspeaker
.............................................................. 3.6
Settings
.............................................................................................................. 3.18
Softkey ADD ADDRESS
.................................................................................... 3.81
Softkey Add Preset
.......................................................................................... 3.116
Softkey ALC Config
.......................................................................................... 3.100
Softkey AM Mod Lev
.......................................................................................... 3.96
Softkey Attack
.................................................................................................... 3.92
Softkey CH Spacing
........................................................................................... 3.52
Softkey Clipper
................................................................................................... 3.52
Softkey Clipper Lev
............................................................................................ 3.92
Softkey Clock Src
............................................................................................... 3.99
Softkey Codec Calibration
............................................................................... 3.100
Softkey Com Mode
............................................................................................ 3.51
Softkey Comp. Accept
..................................................................................... 3.112
Softkey Date Format
........................................................................................ 3.121
Softkey Decay
.................................................................................................... 3.92
Softkey Default Settings
..................................................................................... 3.85
Softkey DELETE ADDRESS
.............................................................................. 3.81
Softkey Delete Preset
...................................................................................... 3.116
Softkey Delete all Presets
................................................................................ 3.116
Softkey Display Brightness
.............................................................................. 3.121
Softkey Display Contrast
.................................................................................. 3.121
Softkey Domain
................................................................................................ 3.116
Softkey Edit Preset
.......................................................................................... 3.116
Softkey Emergency Clear
.................................................................................. 3.21
Softkey Emgcy Clr Bat Timeout
......................................................................... 3.94
Softkey Frequency
............................................................................................. 3.51
Softkey Frequency Format
............................................................................... 3.120
Softkey Guard
.................................................................................................. 3.109
Softkey Guard Volume
..................................................................................... 3.100
Softkey Half Duplex
........................................................................................... 3.52
Softkey I/O Mapping
........................................................................................ 3.110
Softkey Indicator Brightness
............................................................................ 3.121
6125.1651.12.02
I.6
Index
Softkey Input
...................................................................................................... 3.91
Softkey Keyboard Brightness
........................................................................... 3.121
Softkey Marker Ack
................................................................................... 3.52, 3.53
Softkey Marker Volume
.................................................................................... 3.100
Softkey MMI Parameters
................................................................................. 3.120
Softkey Modulation
............................................................................................ 3.49
Softkey OCXO
................................................................................................... 3.99
Softkey Offline
.................................................................................................. 3.104
Softkey Operational Access
............................................................................... 3.21
Softkey Options
................................................................................................ 3.103
Softkey OVERLOAD
.......................................................................................... 3.92
Softkey Overload
............................................................................................... 3.93
Softkey PA Config
.............................................................................................. 3.96
Softkey Polarity
................................................................................................ 3.111
Softkey Preset Config
...................................................................................... 3.115
Softkey Preset Scan
.......................................................................................... 3.21
Softkey Protocol Config
................................................................................... 3.112
Softkey PTT Config
.......................................................................................... 3.113
Softkey PTT Map
............................................................................................. 3.112
Softkey Pwr Sup Main
........................................................................................ 3.99
Softkey Radio Date
............................................................................................ 3.84
Softkey Radio Time
............................................................................................ 3.84
Softkey Ref In Imp
............................................................................................. 3.99
Softkey Ref Out
.................................................................................................. 3.99
Softkey Release all Resources
........................................................................ 3.105
Softkey Resource Mgmt
................................................................................... 3.104
Softkey RX AF AGC
........................................................................................... 3.52
Softkey RX Gain
.............................................................................................. 3.102
Softkey RX Out Ctrl
.......................................................................................... 3.102
Softkey RX Out Lev
......................................................................................... 3.102
Softkey Scrn Saver
.......................................................................................... 3.121
Softkey SELECT QOS
....................................................................................... 3.81
Softkey Sensitivity
.............................................................................................. 3.92
Softkey Sidetone Volume
................................................................................. 3.100
Softkey SORT ADDRESS
.................................................................................. 3.81
Softkey Squelch
...................................................................................... 3.53, 3.102
Softkey Squelch Level S/N
................................................................................ 3.91
Softkey Squelch Level UHF
............................................................................... 3.93
Softkey Squelch Level VHF
............................................................................... 3.93
Softkey TCXO
.................................................................................................... 3.99
Softkey Tone
...................................................................................................... 3.53
Softkey TX Dev FM LK11
.................................................................................. 3.91
Softkey TX Dev FM NB
...................................................................................... 3.91
Softkey TX Dev FM WB
..................................................................................... 3.91
Softkey TX Dev Trim
.......................................................................................... 3.91
Softkey TX Offset
............................................................................................... 3.53
Softkey Used Filter
............................................................................................. 3.98
Softkey Used PA
................................................................................................ 3.96
I.7
6125.1651.12.02
Index
Softkey VCXO
.................................................................................................... 3.99
Softkeys
............................................................................................................. 3.10
Software Package
................................................................................................ 1.8
Special Key Combinations
................................................................................... 3.6
Squelch
.............................................................................................................. 3.49
Status of Optional Access Rights
....................................................................... 3.13
Subnet Mask
...................................................................................................... 3.80
Supervisor Pin
.................................................................................................... 3.31
Suspend Mode
................................................................................................... 3.22
Switching the Transceiver Off
............................................................................ 2.20
Switching the Transceiver On
............................................................................ 2.18
Synthesizer
................................................................................................. 1.6, 3.91
T
Test Tone
........................................................................................................... 3.50
Toggle Softkey
................................................................................................... 3.18
Top View without Cover
....................................................................................... 1.7
Touch up
.............................................................................................................. 5.9
Transmit Mode
..................................................................................................... 1.8
Transmitter Unit
................................................................................................... 1.6
Troubleshooting
................................................................................................. 3.72
TX Offset
............................................................................................................ 3.49
U
UHF Filter
............................................................................................................. 1.6
Unpacking
............................................................................................................ 2.1
Up/Down Converter
......................................................................................... 3.102
User Information
.................................................................................................. 1.1
UX 4401
........................................................................................................... 3.102
V
Valid Radio Operation and Communication Modes for Filters
............................. 2.8
Valid Radio Operation and Communication Modes for Power Amplifiers
.......... 2.12
Voice Communication Mode
.............................................................................. 3.48
VT 4403
............................................................................................................... 1.6
W
Waveforms
......................................................................................................... 3.48
Wideband Analog Communication Mode
........................................................... 3.48
Wideband Digital Baseband Communication Mode
........................................... 3.48
Wideband Digital Diphase Communication Mode
.............................................. 3.48
Wiring Diagram - e.g. FD 221
............................................................................ 2.10
Wiring Diagram - e.g. FD 430
............................................................................ 2.17
Wiring Diagram - e.g. VD 480L
.......................................................................... 2.14
Wiring Diagram - e.g. VU 220L
.......................................................................... 2.15
6125.1651.12.02
I.8
User Information
1.
User Information
This documentation describes the following transceivers:
VHF Transceivers R&S XU 4410A and R&S XU 4460A
UHF Transceivers R&S XD 4410A and R&S XD 4460A
VHF/UHF Transceivers R&S XT 4410A and R&S XT 4460A
Ruggedized Version
The only difference between the transceivers is the frequency range (XU = VHF, XD = UHF, XT = VHF/
UHF), the mechanical design and that the R&S XU 4410A, R&S XD 4410A or R&S XT 4410A has a
Control Unit R&S GB 4000C installed at the front instead of the dummy panel of R&S XU 4460A,
R&S XD 4460A or R&S XT 4460A. Therefore, reference is mostly made to the "transceiver" or "radio"
in general. The differences are only described where it is necessary.
Identification of radio types:
X
T
4
4
1
0 A
Waveform
A: Fixed Frequency
J: EPM Application
L: EPM Application
M: EPM Application
E: Multi Application
Control Interface
F: Multi Application
1: Local
K: EPM Application
6: Remote
Frequency
Range
Series Designator
D: UHF
U: VHF
T: VHF/UHF
Type Designator
E: Receiver
S: Transmitter
X: Transceiver
1.1
6125.1651.12.02
1.1
General Features
General Features
R&S M3SR (= multiband, multimode and multirole surface radio, see Fig. 1.1) is an economic, highly
flexible and future-oriented radio generation for military or non-military applications. It is designed as an
advanced, reliable and dynamic communications platform to meet the joint tactical radio objectives and
the requirements for stationary and mobile communications scenarios.
The high-performance digital R&S M3SR transceiver can be used for transmission and reception in the
VHF and/or UHF band (depends on installed option codes).
The radios are capable of transmitting and/or receiving analog voice, digital voice and data in all commonly used modes, i.e. AM and FM in either narrowband or wideband configurations.
R&S M3SR transceivers operate in the fixed frequency mode.
Fig. 1.1 R&S M3SR Transceiver, Front View
1
2
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1
1 2 -
R&S XU4 460A, R&S XD 4460A or R&S XT 4460A
R&S XU 4410A, R&S XD 4410A or R&S XT 4410A - Ruggedized Version
6125.1651.12.02
1.2
General benefits of the transceiver are:
General benefits of the transceiver are:
Open-system architecture to customize for individual, initial or future needs.
Digital software programming of multiband, multifunction and multimode technology platform
for advanced data waveforms, allowing flexible use and fast upgrading.
High modularity ("sliced radio") with a variety of internal modules and rear interfaces to meet
the customer's operational and system requirements.
Flexible man-machine interface due to various local control panels and remote control units.
Simple data handling in networks compatible with standard interfaces (RS 232, LAN-Network).
High reliability (MTBF), short MTTR and efficient testability together with optimum maintainability.
1.3
6125.1651.12.02
1.2
Note
UHF Filter
R&S ET 4400G
Antenna Interface
R&S GI 4403
Circulator
OCXO
Link 11
Model
R&S FD 4430
VHF / UHF Guard Receiver
Refer to (A2. - Drawings).
02
---
---
---
---
---
---
03
---
x
---
---
---
---
05
---
x
---
mod. 02
---
---
06
---
x
---
---
---
---
13
x
x
---
---
---
---
15
x
x
---
mod. 02
---
---
22
---
x
---
---
---
x
31
---
x
---
---
x
---
37
---
x
---
mod. 03
x
---
41
x
x
---
---
x
---
42
---
x
---
---
x
x
48
x
x
---
mod. 04
x
---
60
---
x
upgradeable
---
---
---
61
x
x
upgradeable
---
x
---
63
x
x
x
---
---
---
6125.1651.12.02
1.4
special frequency range
Required Personnel
1.3
Required Personnel
Configuration of the transceiver must be done by qualified personnel. Skilled personnel is needed for
the installation and the operation of the transceiver.
The personnel must be familiar with the relevant documentation.
1.4
Required Power Supply
The transceiver operates on a DC voltage of 28 VDC (28 to 29 VDC). This voltage is provided as an
option by the external AC Power Supply R&S IN 4000A (19" rackmount of 1 height unit, see Fig. 1.2)
or R&S IN 2100 (not shown) available for the purpose. The connecting cable between transceiver and
power supply is available on demand.
The transceiver may also be powered by an external battery (19 to 28 VDC, nominal). An automatic
switch-over facility integrated in the transceiver provides for automatic battery switchover in case primary power fails.
Fig. 1.2 Power Supply R&S IN 4000A
1
2
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-02003-A-01-1
1 2 -
R&S IN 4000A - standard
R&S IN 4000A - ruggedized
1.5
6125.1651.12.02
1.5
Design, e.g. R&S XT 4410A, Mod. 22
The transceiver (see Fig. 1.3) is accommodated in a 19" case (3 HU) with a removable cover. The following modules are integrated:
Radio Basis R&S KR 4400
It consists of several parts, mainly mechanical parts of the chassis and housing parts for the internal transceiver modules.
The radio platform is located in the left-hand part of the chassis. It contains a number of interface
connectors which are either connected to internal subassemblies or for general purpose to external ones.
The radio module bus, consisting of the radio control bus and radio data bus, transfers internal
data.
The front panel unit, located directly on the right side of the front, has various control and display
elements such as LEDs and buttons, external connectors as well as a loudspeaker.
VHF/UHF Receiver R&S ET 4400 (Main Receiver)
The receiver is a plug-in module located in one of the slots in the left-hand centre part of the chassis. It is of compact design, both sides being EMC-protected by appropriate shielding covers. The
receiver is held in place by quick-release fasteners.
The synthesizer is a plug-in module located in one of the slots in the left-hand centre part of the
chassis. It is of compact design, both sides being EMC-protected by appropriate shielding covers.
The synthesizer is held in place by quick-release fasteners.
The UHF filter is a plug-in module located in the centre left-hand part of the chassis, next to the
control unit. Once plugged into the radio platform in its assigned slot, the UHF filter is held in place
by quick-release fasteners.
The interface module is a plug-in module in the left rear part of the chassis. At its top it carries
several connectors for ribbon-cable connections towards the transmitter unit. In addition, the
plug-in module contains three interfaces for the rear modules.
Transmitter Unit R&S VT 4403
The transmitter unit is a power module located in the right-hand part of the chassis and extending
over its full depth. It consists of the transmitter board at the top and the DC power supply located
underneath. Both subassemblies are shielded by EMC covers. Additionally, a heat sink with two
fans is installed.
The control unit is located on the left side of the front. It contains a display, control and display
elements such as LEDs, fixed-function keys and softkeys, a keypad and a connector.
6125.1651.12.02
1.6
Fig. 1.3 Top View of e.g. R&S XT 4410A, Mod. 22 (without Cover)
10
1
2
3
4
5
9
6
7
8
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00004-A-01-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
-
10 -
Radio Platform (part of Radio Basis R&S KR 4400)
VHF/UHF Receiver R&S ET 4400
Frame (part of Radio Basis R&S KR 4400)
Front Panel Unit (part of Radio Basis R&S KR 4400)
VHF/UHF Transmitter Board with DC Power Supply underneath (both are part of Transmitter Unit R&S VT 4403)
Heatsink with two fans (part of Transmitter Unit R&S VT 4403)
NOTE:
Radio platform connectors are shown without protective caps.
1.7
6125.1651.12.02
1.6
Functioning, e.g. R&S XT 4410A, Mod. 22
The radio platform contains the central processor (= server) of the transceiver. Via LAN/ethernet, the
server is connected to its clients. Clients may be an integrated Control Unit R&S GB 4000C and/or further Control Units R&S GB 4000C connected via the LAN connector X20 and a LAN hub or customerspecific devices. The clients plus the software package R&S DS 4400A form the MMI (= man-machine
interface) of the transceiver. Clients are controlled by using the GB2PP protocol. The MMI guides the
operator through menu-based operating procedures and selectively visualizes all status types on the
display. Commands are entered by making use of the control elements and the keypad. Operation and
indication of the transceiver's operating status are both menu-oriented, operator interaction is performed via the display and keyboard. The modules are controlled by the central processor via the radio
module bus (RMB). The radio platform stores all parameters relating to the individual modules. A system monitor monitors the temperatures and operating voltages. In a clock section all clock signals needed by the radio platform are generated. The RMB connects the modules of R&S XT 4410A to one
another and also to the central processor and the I/O interfaces. The serial interface is used for data
transmission and remote control purposes. Parallel interfaces are used as discrete inputs and outputs
channels and control for instance an externally connected filter and/or amplifier. An audio frequency
interface (AFI) processes the analog signals in digital form so that they can be transmitted digitally on
the radio data bus (RDB).
At the front panel of the radio platform there are control and display elements. An ethernet port is available for sending and receiving data for service purposes (configuration and software download).
When the transceiver operates in receive mode, the RF signal is taken from antenna connector X30 to
the VHF/UHF transmitter board. From here it is routed via a Tx/Rx switch to the UHF Filter
R&S FD 4430. The input stages of the filter are directly protected against electrostatic discharge. The
filter is working for the VHF/UHF Receiver R&S ET 4400 (main receiver) as a preselector to reduce the
interfering levels from other radios of the platform. In the main receiver, the RF signal passes along a
VHF path (100 to 224.975 MHz) or a UHF path (225 to 512 MHz) to the mixer stages. The mixer stages
get the LO signal (365 to 652 MHz) from VHF/UHF Synthesizer R&S GF 4400T. The AGC-controlled
2nd IF signal with a frequency of 455 kHz is demodulated in the digital section of the receiver. The demodulated baseband signal is taken to the RDB for further processing.
In transmit operation, VHF/UHF Synthesizer R&S GF 4400T generates a carrier frequency in the range
from 100 MHz to 512 MHz. For amplitude modulation, this carrier frequency is modulated by the VHF/
UHF transmitter board. FM signals (both analog FM and digital FSK signals) are generated by the synthesizer to be merely amplified by the VHF/UHF transmitter board (signal RF_Drive). After amplification
and filtering, the resulting signal is made available at antenna connector X30. The UHF Filter
R&S FD 4430 is working as postselector. The filter chain is located within the transmit path of the radio.
The selectivity of the filter chain reduces the transmitted noise energy of the radio which may degrade
the sensitivity of other receiving radios on the platform.
Interface Module R&S GH 4450 connects the RMB and discrete signals between the radio platform, the
VHF/UHF transmitter board and up to three further rear modules. The RMB switches from transmission
to reception status.
The integrated DC power supply uses the +28 VDC input voltage to generate all voltages required in
R&S XT 4410A.
6125.1651.12.02
1.8
Fig. 1.4 Block Diagram of e.g. R&S XT 4410A, Mod. 22
1.9
6125.1651.12.02
1.7
General Data
General Data
Refer to A2. - Drawings
1.8
Recommended Accessories
Refer to A2. - Drawings.
6125.1651.12.02
1.10
Preparation for Use
2.
Preparation for Use
2.1
R&S M3SR - Unpacking
After delivery, perform the following steps:
1
Unpack the transceiver.
2
Check if the delivery (transceiver and accessories) is complete by comparing it to the delivery
note.
3
Check the delivery for transport damage.
4
If you find any damage, contact the shipping agent immediately.
5
Keep the package for later use, in case the tranceiver must be sent to a Rohde & Schwarz representative for servicing.
2.1
6125.1651.12.02
2.2
R&S M3SR - Installation
See interface description (A2. - Drawings).
For installation (see Fig. 2.1) into a 19" rack with telescopic slides proceed as follows:
1
Take the right-hand telescopic slide and extend it as far as possible.
2
Press the automatic unlocking device and pull the innermost slide completely out.
3
Attach the innermost slide to the right-hand side panel of the transceiver with four Phillips screws
and the associated washers.
4
Take the left-hand telescopic slide and extend it as far as possible.
5
Press the automatic unlocking device and pull the innermost slide completely out.
6
Attach the innermost slide to the left-hand side panel of the transceiver with four Phillips screws
and the associated washers.
7
Take the outer telescopic slides and mount them to the rack.
8
Insert the transceiver, with its slides fitted, into the extended slides of the rack and slide it in until
the stop is reached.
9
Fasten the transceiver to the rack using four screws.
6125.1651.12.02
2.2
Fig. 2.1 Installation into a 19" Rack
2
1
3
4
5
6
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00006-A-01-1
11 2 3 4 5 6 -
Fixing at rack at the front side
The maximum screw-in depth is 3.5 mm
8 x Phillips screws M4 x 6 (Ident. no.: 0396.8181.00)
8 x washer (Ident. no.: 0005.0315.00)
Telescopic slide (Ident. no.: 0657.5807.00 (6105.9263.00))
Extension of the telescopic slide: 377.7 mm (530.1 mm)
Side length: 457.2 mm (508 mm)
NOTE:
The telescopic slides are available on demand (Ident. no. 0657.5807.00, only for racks provided for a fixed depth of 600 mm and accessible from the rear, or 6105.9263.00 for trailing
cable installation).
The load capacity for the telescopic slides is 380 N.
2.3
6125.1651.12.02
2.3
R&S M3SR - Connect Procedures
CAUTION
Connect the mains cable only after all other wiring has been made.
Keep off the antenna while transmission is in progress. During transmission dangerous high voltages and electromagnetic fields are produced. Respect the instructions
of DIN VDE 0848-2 and the ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) Guidelines for non-ionizing emission (see www.icnirp.org).
NOTE:
For detailed information on connectors and contact assignment see the interface description (A2. - Drawings).
6125.1651.12.02
2.4
2.3.1
Basic Connection
Rear Side
Necessary cabling at the rear side:
Fig. 2.2 Rear Cabling
2
1
5
4
3
ICN-4F-C-231000-R-D0894-00007-A-02-1
11 2 3 4 5 -
Connector X30 to antenna
Connector Ground
LAN connector X20 to remote control unit (required for radios without built-in control unit)
Connector X31 to external power supply (e.g. R&S IN 4000A or R&S IN 2100)
Connector X32 to external battery
NOTE:
The cable between connector X31 DC IN (part of radio) and the relevant connector of the
power supply is available on demand.
R&S IN 4000A: 6105.5639.xx (xx = 05: 0.5 m, 10: 1.0 m, 25: 2.5 m)
R&S IN 2100: 6120.3956.02
The connector X32 is an optional battery connection (19 to 28 VDC,
failure the system switches automatically to this battery supply.
2.5
25 A). In case of a power supply
6125.1651.12.02
Front Side
Necessary cabling at the front side:
Fig. 2.3 Front Cabling, e.g. R&S XT 4410A (Ruggedized)
3
2
1
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00008-A-01-1
1 2 3 -
Headset connector for e.g. R&S GA 015
Service connector
Fill Gun connector
Fill Gun Connector
Refer to 3.4 - Scenarios
Service Connector
The Service connector is used
for
remote control of the system
software download
monitoring the system
In normal operation the service
connector is not used.
6125.1651.12.02
2.6
Connector for Headset GA 015
The connector is used for LOCAL mode operation (voice).
2.3.2
Connection of Peripheral Equipment
NOTE:
Use double-shielded cables to connect external equipment. This is the only way to guarantee that the specified radiation values are met.
2.3.2.1
Filters
Overview
Table 2.1: Overview: Filter
Type
Description
Control Lines
Band
Max. Input
Power
R&S FD 221
Electrically tunable filter
Frequency, Tx-Inhibit
UHF
> 100 W
R&S FU 221
Electrically tunable filter
VHF
> 100 W
R&S FD 220
Manually operated filter
No
UHF
> 100 W
R&S FU 220
No
VHF
> 100 W
R&S FD 225
No
UHF
> 100 W
R&S FU 214A
Motor tuned filter
VHF
> 100 W
R&S FD 213A
Motor tuned filter
UHF
> 100 W
R&S FD 213A2
Motor tuned filter
UHF
> 100 W
R&S FT 213A
Motor tuned filter
VHF and
UHF
> 100 W
NOTE:
In the MMI only a filter of the type "External" can be selected. As this is representative of all
other filters listed above, select this menu item to use one of the other filters.
2.7
6125.1651.12.02
Table 2.2: Valid Radio Operation and Communication Modes for Filters
Motor tuned
Manual
Electrical
R&S FU 214A
R&S FD 220
R&S FD 221
R&S FD 213A
R&S FU 220
R&S FU 221
R&S FD 213A2
R&S FD 225
R&S FT 213A
Mode
Band
FF voice/data plain
VHF
yes
yes
yes
FF WB analog
UHF
yes
yes
yes
FF voice/data cipher
VHF
yes
yes
yes
UHF
yes
yes
yes
VHF
yes
yes
yes
UHF
yes
yes
yes
Link 11
UHF
yes
yes
yes
HDR
UHF
yes
yes
yes
FF WB digital
6125.1651.12.02
2.8
Configuration
No configuration of the R&S M3SR transceiver is necessary because frequency control is done automatically.
No protection is built in against wrong frequency commands to the filter.
A filter has 20 seconds to perform a commanded frequency change. Otherwise, the R&S M3SR software generates an error message.
For further system aspects with frequency hopping applications, please use the R&S M3SR control pin
'Relay_1' = '~ECCM' = default on X21.1 (and e.g. R&S ZS 402 for external RF bypass), if necessary.
The transceiver controls the output 'Relay_1' like this:
In FF = High
In Link 11 = High
HDR = High
2.9
6125.1651.12.02
Wiring Diagrams
Fig. 2.4 Wiring Diagram R&S M3SR Transceiver - e.g. R&S FD 221
2
1
3
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00020-A-01-1
1 2 3 -
R&S M3SR Transceiver
R&S FD 221
To Antenna
6125.1651.12.02
2.10
Fig. 2.5 Wiring Diagram R&S M3SR Transceiver - e.g. R&S FD 213A
2
1
3
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00021-A-01-1
1 2 3 -
R&S FD 213A
To Antenna
2.11
6125.1651.12.02
2.3.2.2
Power Amplifiers
Table 2.3: Overview: Power Amplifiers
Motor tuned
R&S FU 214A
R&S FD 213A
R&S FD 213A2
R&S FT 213A
Manual
R&S FD 220
R&S FU 220
R&S FD 225
Electrical
R&S FD 221
R&S FU 221
Mode
Band
FF voice/data plain
VHF
yes
yes
yes
FF WB analog
UHF
yes
yes
yes
VHF
yes
yes
yes
UHF
yes
yes
yes
VHF
yes
yes
yes
UHF
yes
yes
yes
Link 11
UHF
yes
yes
yes
HDR
UHF
yes
yes
yes
FF WB digital
R&S VU 220L
R&S VD 480L
R&S FD 430
R&S FD 4420
Table 2.4: Valid Radio Operation and Communication Modes for Power Amplifiers
FF voice/data plain
VHF
yes
no
no
no
FF WB analog
UHF
no
yes
yes
yes
VHF
yes
no
no
no
UHF
no
yes
yes
yes
VHF
yes
no
no
no
UHF
no
yes
yes
yes
UHF
no
Tx only
yes
yes
Band
Mode
FF WB digital
Link 11
6125.1651.12.02
2.12
Additional information for R&S VD 480L:
In Link 11 mode the amplifier is permanently set to transmission (= Tx only), so no reception is possible.
If, however, the amplifier needs to be operated in Link 11, connect a separate Rx antenna to the transceiver.
Configuration
CAUTION
The R&S M3SR transceiver cannot automatically detect a connected amplifier.
Therefore the transceiver must be configured before putting it into operation. Proceed with extreme care when configuring the transceiver.
Wrong transceiver configuration may damage the used peripheral amplifier!
1
Press softkey MAINT (part of menu 0000 Main Menu).
2
Press softkey RADIO MAINT (part of menu 1000 Maintenance).
3
Press softkey RADIO MODULES (part of menu 1100 Radio Maintenance).
4
Select the folder POWER AMPLIFIER (part of menu 1150 Radio Modules).
5
Press softkey USED PA.
6
Enter the Maint PIN via the numerical keypad.
7
Press ENT key.
8
Select the desired power amplifier.
Here the amplifier to be operated with the transceiver is selected. Only one amplifier can be connected at a time. If no amplifier is connected, select INTERNAL.
9
Press ENT key.
10
Press softkey PA CONFIG.
11
Select the folder of the amplifier selected in step 8. Here the driving power for the power levels
Low, Med, High for AM and FM is defined. The driving power indirectly determines the output
power of the amplifier (for gain refer to data sheet of relevant amplifier) and thus the transmission
coverage with this amplifier type. Only R&S VD 480L/R&S VU 220L:
By means of the On/Off switch the user determines at which power level the external amplifier is
to be connected into line or whether it is bypassed.
2.13
6125.1651.12.02
Wiring Diagrams
Fig. 2.6 Wiring Diagram R&S M3SR Transceiver - R&S VD 480L
2
1
3
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00022-A-01-1
1 2 3 -
R&S VD 480L
To Antenna
When frequencies outside the frequency range of 225 to 400 MHz are used, R&S VD 480L will be bypassed.
Make sure that in R&S VD 480L the jumpers for connector X400 are set as follows (see also the relevant documentation), otherwise an error message may come up:
X400.1 and .2: jumper (voltage error)
X400.3 and .4: no jumper (no input power monitoring)
X400.5 and .6: jumper (VSWR error)
6125.1651.12.02
2.14
The following CBIT messages relating to R&S VD 480L may occur:
600 IF CBIT OF EXT AMP
602 IF VSWR OF EXT AMP
603 EXT PA TUNING X27
607 EXT PA LOW CARRIER
Fig. 2.7 Wiring Diagram R&S M3SR Transceiver - R&S VU 220L
2
1
3
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00023-A-01-1
1 2 3 -
R&S VU 220L
To Antenna
2.15
6125.1651.12.02
When frequencies outside the band of 118 to 144 MHz are used, a protection circuit prevents the transmitter from being activated. That is, when an amplifier is connected, transmission outside this frequency
band is impossible. When the protection is active, the central area shows the symbol
er' line.
To transmit outside this frequency band the following measure must be taken:
Disconnect transceiver from power amplifier.
In menu 1150 Radio Modules press softkey USED PA and select INTERNAL.
The following CBIT messages relating to R&S VU 220L may occur:
602 IF VSWR OF EXT AMP
607 EXT PA LOW CARRIER
6125.1651.12.02
2.16
in the 'Pow-
Fig. 2.8 Wiring Diagram R&S M3SR Transceiver - e.g. R&S FD 430
2
1
3
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00024-A-01-1
1 2 3 -
R&S FD 430
To Antenna
The wiring diagram for R&S FD 4420 is the same as that for R&S FD 430.
When frequencies outside the band of 225 to 400 MHz are used, a protection circuit prevents the transmitter from being activated. That is, when an amplifier/filter is connected, transmission outside this frequency band is impossible. When the protection is active, the central area shows the symbol
in
the 'Power' line.
To transmit outside this frequency band the following measures must be taken:
Disconnect transceiver from amplifier/filter
In menu 1150 Radio Modules press softkey USED PA and select INTERNAL.
No CBIT message is related to R&S FD 430 or R&S FD 4420.
2.17
6125.1651.12.02
2.4
R&S M3SR - Power Up
R&S M3SR - Power Up
Minimum Requirements
Before putting the transceiver into operation make sure that the following minimum requirements are
met:
Power Supply R&S IN 4000A or R&S IN 2100 (or a battery complying with the technical specifications) is available.
Antenna is connected.
Handset or headset is connected.
See also 2.3 - R&S M3SR - Connect Procedures.
Fig. 2.9 Switching the Transceiver On
8
7
6
4
5
3
2
1
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00011-A-01-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
LED AC / DC
Key ON / OFF
LED 1 to 4
LED GO
LED GO (only local-controlled transceiver)
LED ON (only local-controlled transceiver)
LED CU (only local-controlled transceiver)
Key ON / OFF (only local-controlled transceiver)
By pressing the
button (2, Fig. 2.9) at the tranceiver the latter is switched on. A built-in control
unit , if installed, will be switched on automatically, too. On the built-in control unit you can also press
the button (8, Fig. 2.9) to switch on both units.
NOTE:
By pressing the button (8, Fig. 2.9), only the display is switched off (see Suspend Mode is
Active).
6125.1651.12.02
2.18
R&S M3SR - Power Up
The following LEDs are illuminated to indicate readiness for operation:
CU (7, Fig. 2.9): control unit ok
ON (6, Fig. 2.9): control unit ready for operation
GO (4 and 5, Fig. 2.9): transceiver ok
1 (3, Fig. 2.9): indicates which signal is being output via the loudspeaker
AC/DC (1, Fig. 2.9): power available
The last displayed menu is shown again (only local-controlled transceiver).
NOTE:
If the PBIT (automatic power-on built-in test) during the startup of the system dectects an
error, perform an IBIT to get more information.
If the LED 1 remains dark, press the SELECT button.
2.19
6125.1651.12.02
2.5
R&S M3SR - Power Down
R&S M3SR - Power Down
Fig. 2.10 Switching the Transceiver Off
8
7
6
4
5
3
2
1
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00011-A-01-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
LED AC / DC
Key ON / OFF
LED 1 to 4
LED GO
LED GO (only local-controlled transceiver)
LED ON (only local-controlled transceiver)
LED CU (only local-controlled transceiver)
Key ON / OFF (only local-controlled transceiver)
By pressing the
button (2, Fig. 2.10) the transceiver is switched off. A built-in control unit, if in-
stalled, will be switched off automatically, too.
6125.1651.12.02
2.20
Operation
3.
Operation
3.1
Overview
R&S M3SR (multiband, multimode, multirole surface radio) is a new software radio generation. The parameters of the radio are set via the man-machine interface (MMI). This means that the radios can be
reprogrammed regarding waveforms and external interfaces. Modules like a guard receiver as well as
a protection processor module can be integrated. Each module has an integrated firmware. Therefore
the radio has an open system architecture that allows future updates.
Additional Options and Modules
The possibility of this radio generation to enhance functionality by loading new application software is
an outstanding new feature. This requires a certain expansion stage regarding the hardware. If it is necessary, new hardware modules can be integrated.
Device settings can be made locally via the menus of the local control panel (CP) or via a remote control
unit (CU) or via remote control commands (GB2PP protocol) via LAN. Software and hardware options
are available to provide the radio units with additional EPM waveforms.
Frequency Ranges of Basic Units
The frequency ranges depend on installed option codes.
Modularity
All R&S M3SR units are based on the uniform Radio Basis R&S KR 4400, which consists of a mechanical frame, the radio platform and the audio front panel. The radio platform itself processes the AF signals, independently of the transmitter and the receiver modules. Depending on the desired radio
equipment configuration, radio modules such as main receiver, synthesizer or guard receiver are inserted. A transmitter module with an integrated DC/DC power supply is built in. Six free slots for userspecific plug-in cards are integrated in the rear part of the unit.
Local / Remote Application
The radio is delivered by default without an integrated control unit. The local Control Unit R&S
GB 4000C is available as an option.
The radio can be completely remote-configured and controlled for example with the R&S GB 4000C.
There is no limitation for remote control. In local mode the radio can be used as a tabletop unit as a
voice radio. Then it is controlled by the integrated control unit.
3.1
6125.1651.12.02
Overview
Fig. 3.1 R&S M3SR Radios
1
2
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1
1 2 -
Radio without integrated control unit
Radio with integrated control unit
6125.1651.12.02
3.2
Overview
Network Topology
The following figure shows one possible arrangement of several radios and control units in a LAN.
Fig. 3.2 Example of a Network Topology
1
3
2
3
4
4
2
3
5
4
6
6
2
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-30006-A-01-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
-
Local-controlled transceiver
Remote-controlled transceiver
Control unit
Hub
Router with gateways
e.g. further radios
3.3
6125.1651.12.02
3.2
Basic Operating Concepts
This part of the documentation gives an overview of how to operate the radio via the front panel and/or
a control unit. For operation via control unit, details are provided relating to the menu page structure
and the possibilities to navigate within the menu tree or to change settings.
3.2.1
Radio Settings/Displays via Front Panel
The front panel contains several keys, volume controls and a RESET button, which are used to make
a limited number of radio settings. LEDs are available to indicate the status of the radio.
Fig. 3.3 Radio Front Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
11
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -
10
9
7
8
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00173-A-01-1
Indicators for selected AF signal source
Indicator for local mode
Indicators for used power supply (battery, AC/DC)
ON/OFF button
Button for local mode/special function mode
SELECT button for setting the AF signal for the loudspeaker/special function selector
Volume control for the headset
Connector for the headset
Volume control for the loudspeaker
Radio status indicators and RESET button
LAN Service connector
Connector for Fill Gun
6125.1651.12.02
3.4
Radio Settings
The following settings can be made at the front panel:
Adjusting the volume with the volume controls for the loudspeaker and headset
Switching the radio on or off with the ON/OFF button
Setting the radio in LOCAL or REMOTE mode with the LOCAL button
Selecting the AF source for the loudspeaker or the headset with the SELECT button
Restarting the software with the RESET button
The indicators at the front panel show the following radio status:
KEY LED shows that the radio is ready to load data from a connected Fill Gun.
GO LED shows that the radio is fully operative.
CARR LED shows that the radio is transmitting in broadcast mode.
SQL M shows that the main receiver has a signal above its configured squelch level.
SQL G shows that the guard receiver has a signal above its configured squelch level.
LEDs 1 to 4 indicate the source for the loudspeaker or headset.
Table 3.1: Dependency between LEDs (1 to 4) and the Audible AF Signal
LED
1
2
AF Signal
3
4
no AF signal
lighted
AF signal of main receiver and in addition of
guard receiver, if switched on via softkey GUARD
in '1140 Audio Monitoring' menu (see 3.6.3.6 Audio Monitoring).
flashing
AF signal of guard receiver (VHF band)
flashing
flashing
AF signal of guard receiver (UHF band)
flashing
AF signal of guard receiver (VHF and UHF band)
LOCAL shows that the radio is in local mode.
BATT shows that power is supplied by a battery.
AC/DC shows that power is supplied by the mains.
3.5
6125.1651.12.02
Setting the Signals on the Loudspeaker
By pressing the SELECT button repeatedly the settings can be changed according to Table 3.1.
Special Key Combinations
The radio has special key combinations to set the default address management and the default configuration.
Combinations of the LOCAL and SELECT button allow the following actions:
Reset the parameters of the address mangement to
IP address = 192.168.52.46
subnet mask = 255.255.240.0
Reset the radio to the default configuration
For setting the default address management proceed as follows:
1
Press the LOCAL button until the LOCAL LED starts flashing (approximately 5 sec.).
2
Press the SELECT button once so that LED 1 flashes, too.
3
Press the LOCAL button again until the LOCAL LED flashes faster (approximately 5 sec.). If the
default address management has been set, the LOCAL LED stops flashing and the radio restarts.
For setting the radio to the default configuration proceed as follows:
1
Press the LOCAL button until the LOCAL LED starts flashing (approximately 5 sec.).
2
Press the SELECT button twice so that LED 2 flashes, too.
3
Press the LOCAL button again until the LOCAL LED flashes faster (approximately 5 sec.) If the
default configuration has been set, the LOCAL LED stops flashing and the radio restarts.
NOTE:
The special key combinations of LOCAL and SELECT (3 x or 4 x) are reserved for future
use.
Change of Parameters
Changed parameters may be lost if the radio is switched off immediately after entering the new setting.
Therefore allow at least 5 seconds for the radio to store the changed parameters correctly before
switching it off.
6125.1651.12.02
3.6
3.2.2
Operation via Control Unit
The control unit is the main user interface to control and use the radio.
Fig. 3.4 Control Unit Front Panel
1
2
3
6
4
5
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00174-A-01-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
-
15 softkeys
Display
Numeric keypad (12 keys)
Knob
4 buttons (ON/OFF, MENU HOME, ESC CLR, ENT)
4 LEDs (ON, CU, G, GO)
3.7
6125.1651.12.02
3.2.2.1
Graphical User Interface Design
The graphical user interface (GUI) consists of many menu pages organised in a menu tree with hierarchical structure.
A unique menu number is assigned to each menu page . This menu number identifies the level currently
activated:
Top level = 0000 (Main Menu)
1st level = x000, e.g. 1000 Maintenance
2nd level = xx00, e.g. 1100 Radio Maintenance
3rd level = xxx0, e.g. 1120 Radio Error List, or xxx5, e.g. 1125 Radio Inventory
Bottom level = xxxy or xxxz (if 3rd level = xxx0, the last digit is 0 < y < 5, e.g. 1121 Radio Error Details;
if 3rd level = xxx5, the last digit is 5 < z 9, e.g. 1126 Radio Inventory Details)
6125.1651.12.02
3.8
Fig. 3.5 Extract of Menu Structure, Example
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00186-A-01-1
3.9
6125.1651.12.02
3.2.2.2
Softkeys
15 softkeys around the screen are used for operation via the graphical user interface. The softkey functions are software-assigned depending on the selected menu.
Fig. 3.6 Location of Softkeys
1
1 2 -
2
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00175-A-01-1
Softkey
Softkey label
NOTE:
There are three possibilities for a softkey to be greyed out:
The function is currently not available because the parameter cannot be used in this device
status (e.g. Tx Offset in modulation mode FM).
The Manual softkey is greyed out to indicate that Manual mode has already been selected.
Access rights are missing.
6125.1651.12.02
3.10
3.2.2.3
Control Unit LEDs
The control unit has the following LEDs to indicate the status:
LED ON The LED is on if the control unit is on.
The LED flashes if the control unit is off.
LED CU
The LED is on if the control unit is fully operative.
LED GO
The LED is on if the connected radio is fully operative.
LED G
The LED is on if a guard signal above the configured level is received.
3.2.2.4
Menu Page Design
Each menu page consists of a header and a central area.
Fig. 3.7 Menu Page Design with Indicators
1
3
22
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00176-A-01-1
1 2 3 -
Header
Status indicators
Central area
3.11
6125.1651.12.02
3.2.2.4.1
Header
The header design is identical for all menu pages. The design is shown in the figure below.
Fig. 3.8 Header Design
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00177-A-01-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
-
Menu number
Menu name
Connection status
Status local/remote mode
Offline or online status of radio
Status of access rights
Indication of manual or preset mode
Logical addresses of the radio (R) and the control unit (C)
Menu icon
6125.1651.12.02
3.12
Connection Status
Several symbols indicate the radio/control unit connection status (for details refer to 3.3.4.3 - Control
Unit / Radio Connection)
Symbol
shows that the control unit is not connected to the radio.
Symbol
shows that the control unit is being connected to the radio.
Symbol
shows that the control unit is connected to the radio.
Local or Remote Mode
The following symbols indicate local or remote mode (for details refer to 3.3.4 - Local / Remote Mode)
Symbol
shows that the radio is in local mode.
Symbol
shows that the radio is in remote mode.
Offline or Online Status of the Radio
The following symbols indicate if the radio is offline or online (for details refer to 3.3.1 - Operating /
Maintenance Mode)
Symbol
shows that the radio is online.
Symbol
shows that the radio is offline.
Status of Operational Access Rights
The following symbols show the access rights of the control unit (for details refer to 3.3.1 - Operating
/ Maintenance Mode)
Symbol
shows that the control unit has monitoring rights.
Symbol
shows that the control unit has advanced rights.
Symbol
shows that the control unit has fixed rights.
3.13
6125.1651.12.02
Indication of Manual or Preset Mode
The following symbols indicate if the radio is used in manual mode or preset mode.
Symbol
shows that the radio is in manual mode.
Symbol
100 shows that the radio is in preset mode on preset 100.
Symbol
8 shows that the radio is in preset scan mode on preset 8.
Indication of Different Menu Icons
The different menus are indicated by the following symbols (in manual mode):
Symbol
indicates the Main Menu.
Symbol
indicates the Maintenance Menu.
Symbol
indicates the Radio Modules Menu.
Symbol
indicates the Resource Management Menu.
Symbol
indicates the EPM Time Menu.
Symbol
indicates the Emergency Menu.
Symbol
indicates the waveform, e.g. Fixed Frequency.
Symbol
indicates the Special Modes Menu.
Symbol
indicates the Preset Scan Menu.
Symbol
indicates the Context Menu.
6125.1651.12.02
3.14
3.2.2.4.2
Central Area
Operational Menus
In operation mode the current data (e.g. waveform, frequency) and status indicators (e.g. SQL-M, cipher) are displayed in the central area. For displaying variable data (e.g. power, VSWR) bargraphs are
used.
Fig. 3.9 Example: Fixed Frequency Central Area
1
2
5
3
4
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00178-A-01-1
1
2
3
4
5
-
Current settings
Bargraphs
Tx inhibit indicator
Rx inhibit indicator
Status indicators
The following bargraphs are displayed:
Power shows the current transmitting power.
RSSI shows the current received signal strength indicator value.
VSWR shows the current voltage standing wave ratio.
3.15
6125.1651.12.02
Fig. 3.10 Example: Fixed Frequency Central Area - CBIT Error Message
1
ICN-4F-F-E10000-R-D0894-00190-A-01-1
1 -
Radio CBIT error message
6125.1651.12.02
3.16
Configuration Menus
Fig. 3.11 Example - Folder View of Radio Modules
1
2
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00179-A-01-1
1 2 -
Folder
Availability of the radio module
Each radio module is displayed in a separate folder.
With the softkeys
or
the folders can be selected.
3.17
6125.1651.12.02
3.2.2.5
Control Elements
There are control elements to navigate and control elements to make settings.
3.2.2.5.1
Navigation
There are four possibilities to navigate within the menu tree:
With softkey
move one level up in the menu tree (three dots: navigation in upward direction.
With softkey
move to the next page in a menu with several pages.
With a softkey
like
move one level down in the menu tree (three dots: navigation in downward direction.
With button
return from anywhere in the menu tree to the Main Menu.
3.2.2.5.2
Settings
There are several possibilities to change settings:
Toggle softkey
Pressing a softkey like
toggles between two values. Both values are listed in the toggle
softkey. The selected value is shown in blue.
The selected value is used immediately (it is not necessary to press ENT button).
The colour may be green instead of blue (e.g. in softkey Halfduplex) if this function is not possible
due to the device configuration as transmitter/receiver or due to a missing option.
Listbox softkey
Listbox softkeys have a list symbol (black rectangle with shadow) in the right upper corner.
or
(with value or short text) opens a listbox. Use the knob to
select a value from the list. Press the ESC CLR button or the softkey again to discard the selected
value and close the listbox. The selected value is listed in the central area or in the header. The
selected value is shown in blue. Press the ENT button to accept the selected value. The value or
short text in the listbox softkey is blue where the list contains several items and green where there
is only one item in the list.
Editor softkey
Editor softkeys have a list symbol (black rectangle with shadow) in the right upper corner.
opens an editor. Use the knob or the keypad to enter a value in the
editor box. Briefly press the ESC CLR button to clear an entered value. Press the ESC CLR button a bit longer or the softkey again to discard the entered value and close the editor. A green
rectangle around the edit field indicates that the value will be accepted when ENT is pressed. A
black rectangle around the edit field indicates that the value is incomplete or invalid and will not
be accepted when ENT is pressed. Press the ENT button to accept the entered value.
In some editors, e.g. IP address editor, the
6125.1651.12.02
button can be used to jump to the next editor field.
3.18
Menu keys
A softkeys like
is a menu key, identified by three dots in the upper right corner. Pressing
such a key opens a menu or navigates to the next lower level in the menu tree.
Pushbutton
A softkey like
in Preset mode is a pushbutton.
Pressing a pushbutton activates its function and the button remains pressed. Pressing another
pushbutton deactivates the pushbutton again. Example: In Preset mode the Emergency Mode
pushbutton has been pressed. Pressing the Fixed Frequency pushbutton then changes the
mode.
Activate buttons
If a trigger-like activate button (i.e.
further action is required.
If a static-like activate button (i.e.
is pressed.
3.2.2.5.3
) is pressed, the function is executed immediately. No
) is pressed, the function is executed as long as the button
Greyed-out Softkey Labels
There are two reasons for a softkey label to be greyed out (deactivated function):
No access rights
Parameter not usable in current setting
Exception: greyed out softkey Manual indicates that Manual mode is selected
Example 1: If operational access monitoring is activated, the operator cannot change any settings, i.e.
all softkeys used for this purpose are greyed out. To change a setting, operational access advanced
or fixed is required.
Example 2: If modulation mode FM is activated, setting the TX offset does not make any sense, so the
softkey label is greyed out. To change the TX offset modulation mode, AM has to be activated.
3.2.2.5.4
Inactive Data Elements
Values which have no meaning in the current operating mode are represented as follows:
Toggle softkey
grey and no value selected
Editor
grey and '---' in softkey label or central area
3.19
6125.1651.12.02
3.2.2.5.5
Context Menu
The context menu contains special functions which have to be accessible easily. To call up the context
menu press the ENT button for at least 0.3 sec. This works only when no editor/listbox is open. When
leaving the context menu, the previous menu is displayed. The context menu is directly linked to the
menu tree, i.e. you always return to the former position in the menu tree after leaving the context menu.
Fig. 3.12 Context Menu
1
2
6
3
5
4
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00180-B-01-1
1
2
3
4
-
Softkey BACK
Softkey PRESET SCAN
Softkey EMERGENCY CLEAR
Softkey OPERATIONAL ACCESS
6125.1651.12.02
3.20
Fig. 3.13 Context Menu - Fixed Frequency Preset Mode
1
2
6
3
5
4
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00180-B-01-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
-
Softkey BACK
Softkey PRESET SCAN
Softkey RX AF AGC
Softkey CLIPPER
With the BACK softkey (1, Fig. 3.12 and Fig. 3.13 ) you can return to the previous menu.
With the PRESET SCAN softkey (2, Fig. 3.12 and Fig. 3.13) you can activate the Preset Scan menu.
With the OPERATIONAL ACCESS softkey (3, Fig. 3.12 and 6, Fig. 3.12) you can change the access
rights.
The access rights can only be upgraded in this menu, but not reduced.
With the EMERGENCY CLEAR softkey (4, Fig. 3.12 and 5, Fig. 3.13) you can easily delete the stored
data which was loaded with the Fill Gun.
With the RX AF AGC softkey (3, Fig. 3.13) you can switch this function on or off.
With the CLIPPER softkey (4, Fig. 3.13) you can switch this function on or off.
3.21
6125.1651.12.02
3.2.2.6
Screen Saver
The screen saver is automatically switched on through a non-activity timeout. The timer can be configured or switched off in '1340 Control Unit MMI Parameters' menu (see 3.6.4 - Control Unit).
The timer is reset by pressing any key or turning the knob.
Screen Saver is Active
LEDs CU, G and GO show the current status.
LED ON is on.
Display is switched off.
Key illumination is not changed.
Data traffic with the radio is still possible.
3.2.2.7
Suspend Mode
The suspend mode is activated by pressing the
on.
button on the control unit, if the radio is switched
Suspend Mode is Active
LEDs CU, G and GO are off.
LED ON flashes.
Display and key illumination are switched off.
An existing link to the radio is terminated.
6125.1651.12.02
3.22
Operation
3.3
Operation
3.3.1
Operating / Maintenance Mode
3.3.1.1
Operating Mode
This mode is used for normal operation after the radio has been configured for use. The operator performs the settings of the radio to establish radio communications, e.g. selecting a waveform, setting of
waveform specific parameters or keying/unkeying the radio.
Fig. 3.14 Example of Remote Access with Fixed Frequency
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00100-A-01-1
Access Rights in Operating Mode
Several control units can be connected to one radio, but only one can have operational access to the
radio at the same time. To handle the operational access, each connection between a control unit and
a radio gets an operational access right, which can be changed with the OPERATIONAL ACCESS
softkey.
Access without operational setting rights
Monitoring access The user has no right to change radio parameters, but he is able to monitor
the settings.
The symbol
indicates the monitoring mode.
NOTE:
The radio can handle several connections with monitoring access rights.
3.23
6125.1651.12.02
Operation
Access with operational setting rights
Advanced access The user has the right to manipulate and monitor all operational parameters.
The symbol
indicates the advanced mode.
If another control unit requests setting rights for operational parameters, the access right of the
own control unit turns into monitoring access.
Fixed access The user has the right to manipulate and monitor all parameters. The symbol
indicates the fixed mode.
If another control unit requests setting rights for operational parameters, the radio denies this request and the access right of the own control unit remains in fixed access.
NOTE:
The radio can only handle one connection with advanced or fixed access rights.
The radio manages one connection for each control unit. This connection has a remote and a local part.
The respective active part is used. The control unit CU3 is the integrated control unit of the radio.
6125.1651.12.02
3.24
Operation
Fig. 3.15 Access Rights - All Control Units in Monitoring Mode
Radio
Access Manager
Step 1
Control Unit
CU1
Request Advanced Rights
Step 2
Connection CU1
Current status:
Advanced Rights
Receive Advanced Rights
Control Unit
CU2
remote
local
Connection CU2
Current status:
Monitoring Rights
remote
local
Connection CU3
Not Connected
remote
local
Control
Unit
CU3
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00101-A-02-1
Current status: Both control units have monitoring rights. The radio is in remote mode.
Step 1: Control unit 1 requests advanced rights from the radio.
Step 2: The radio server gives advanced rights to control unit 1 because no other control unit has fixed
rights.
New status: Control unit 1 has access with advanced rights. Control unit 2 still has monitoring rights.
3.25
6125.1651.12.02
Operation
Fig. 3.16 Access Rights - Concurrent Access Rights
Radio
Access Manager
Connection CU1
Control Unit
CU1
Step 3
Current status:
Monitoring Rights
Receive Monitoring Rights
remote
local
Step 1
Control Unit
CU2
Step 2
Connection CU2
Current status:
Advanced Rights
remote
local
Receive Advanced Rights
Connection CU3
Not Connected
remote
local
Control
Unit
CU3
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00102-A-02-1
Current status: Control unit 1 has advanced rights, control unit 2 has monitoring rights. The radio is in
remote mode.
Step 2: The radio server gives advanced rights to the control unit 2 because no other control unit has
fixed rights.
Step 3: The access rights of control unit 1 are set back from advanced rights to monitoring rights.
New status: Control unit 1 has access with monitoring rights. Control unit 2 has access with advanced
rights.
6125.1651.12.02
3.26
Operation
Fig. 3.17 Access Rights - Fixed Access Rights
Radio
Access Manager
Step 1
Control Unit
CU1
Request Fixed Rights
Step 2
Connection CU1
Current status:
Fixed Rights
Receive Fixed Rights
Control Unit
CU2
remote
local
Connection CU2
Step 3
Current status:
Monitoring Rights
remote
local
Connection CU3
Not Connected
remote
local
Control
Unit
CU3
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00103-A-02-1
Current status: Control unit 1 has access with monitoring rights, control unit 2 has access with advanced rights. The radio is in remote mode.
Step 1: Control unit 1 requests fixed rights from the radio.
Step 2: The radio server gives fixed rights to control unit 1 because no other control unit has fixed rights.
Step 3: The access rights of control unit 2 are set back from advanced rights to monitoring rights.
New status: Control unit 1 has exclusive access with fixed rights, control unit 2 has access with monitoring rights.
3.27
6125.1651.12.02
Operation
Fig. 3.18 Access Rights - Rejected Access Requests
Radio
Access Manager
Connection CU1
Control Unit
CU1
Current status:
Fixed Rights
remote
local
Step 1
Control Unit
CU2
Step2
Connection CU2
Current status:
Monitoring Rights
remote
local
Connection CU3
Not Connected
remote
local
Control
Unit
CU3
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00104-A-02-1
Current status: Control unit 1 has access with fixed rights, control unit 2 has access with monitoring
rights. The radio is in remote mode.
Step 2: The radio rejects the request of control unit 2 for advanced rights because control unit 1 has
fixed rights.
New status: Control unit 1 has exclusive access with fixed rights, control unit 2 has access with monitoring rights.
6125.1651.12.02
3.28
Operation
3.3.1.2
Maintenance Mode
The radio is configured in the maintenance mode in a way that meets specific requests of the customer
(i.e. selection of applications or configuration of presets).
Fig. 3.19 Maintenance - Overview
Maintenance
(Setup-PIN)
Preset
Configuration
Online
Mode
(Maint.-PIN)
Radio
Maintenance
Offline
Mode
Online
Mode
(Maint.-PIN)
Control Unit
Maintenance
Online
Mode
ICN-M3SR-A-E10000-R-D0894-00106-A-01-1
Access Rights
The maintenance mode has 3 parts
Radio maintenance
Preset configuration
Control unit maintenance
The control unit is used as a setting device for radio maintenance. In offline mode the radio is deactivated. In online mode the radio is in operation mode.
The preset pages can be managed and modified in the preset configuration.
In the control unit maintenance, internal configuration parameters can be set and built-in tests can be
performed.
The access to the maintenance parameters is protected via PINs. In order to get access to the preset
configuration parameters, the respective Setup-PIN is required. For access to the radio maintenance
parameters and the control unit maintenance parameters the relevant Maintenance-PIN is required. As
long as the user remains in the maintenance area, he has access to all parameters. The PIN must be
entered only once. Only if the user leaves the maintenance menu and afterwards wants access to these
parameters again, wil he be asked for the PIN again.
3.29
6125.1651.12.02
Operation
The maintenance mode is not exclusively locked for changing the parameters. The last parameter that
is saved is the active one if several control units change the parameters simultaneously.
For normal maintenance tasks, the system can be used as usual in the online mode. The communication functions are not restricted.
For exclusive maintenance tasks such as a basic configuration, the radio must be set to offline mode.
As a result the communication functions are not available.
NOTE:
By pressing the OFFLINE softkey in the radio maintenance menu the radio can be set offline.
Fixed access rights are required.
Symbol
shows that the radio is offline.
Fig. 3.20 Radio Maintenance Menu
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00107-A-01-1
6125.1651.12.02
3.30
Operation
System PIN
The default setting for all PINs (setup, maintenance) is 00000. If a user modifies the default values and
cannot remember these modified PINs, he nevertheless has access with the System PINs. The System
PINs cannot be modified and depend on the hardware. The User PINs can be changed with the System
PINs.
NOTE:
By pressing the SUPERVISOR ACCESS softkey in the maintenance menu, a menu to enter
the respective System PINs is displayed.
Rohde & Schwarz delivers a System PIN for the Radio and a System PIN for the control unit.
Fig. 3.21 Maintenance - Supervisor Access
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00108-A-01-1
3.31
6125.1651.12.02
3.3.2
Many parameters must be set for voice communication or data transfer. In manual mode the user has
the possibility to select a waveform and to manipulate all waveform specific parameters. In preset mode
the user can also select a waveform, but the waveform specific parameters are loaded (predefined parameters from a so-called preset page).
3.3.2.1
Manual Mode
The manual mode is an expert mode that allows all parameters to be changed.
To establish a connection, a lot of parameters for the receiving and transmitting radio must be identical.
For example if radio 1 is transmitting in AM modulation, radio 2 cannot demodulate the signal if it is configured for FM modulation.
The manual setting of the required parameters is therefore a source of error and time-consuming. So
setting all necessary communication parameters quickly and comprehensively is not possible in manual
mode.
Fig. 3.22 Main Menu - Example of Manual Mode
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00100-A-01-1
6125.1651.12.02
3.32
By pressing the MANUAL softkey in the main menu the manual mode is started.
The manual mode is displayed
by the symbol
in the headline of the central area,
by the PRESET softkey set to None,
by the MANUAL softkey being greyed out.
The central area displays the parameters of the currently selected waveform.
The waveforms and all parameters can be set with the softkeys.
3.33
6125.1651.12.02
3.3.3
Preset Mode
Preset Mode
The preset mode is a non expert mode that allows only a few parameters to be changed. There are
preset parameters that can be loaded easily. The user must only load a preset, which already has all
parameters that were defined by an expert before. These preset parameters are organised in 2 domains (1, 2), each with 200 presets (0 to 199). The organisation of the presets is shown below. For each
waveform the parameters can be set on the preset pages.
6125.1651.12.02
3.34
Preset Mode
Fig. 3.23 Preset Organisation
Domain 1
Domain 2
Preset 0
Preset 0
Preset 77
Preset 77
Preset 199
Preset 199
General
Page
Power
Default Mode
Fixed
Frequency
Page
HDR
Page
Com Mode
Modulation
Frequency
Link11 / Y
Page
Frequency
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00181-A-02-1
The preset mode is therefore a mode which is easy to handle, having only a few sources of error because the data set is already defined. It allows a fast setting of the necessary parameters. The Preset
parameters must be defined beforehand. For more information refer to 3.6.3.10 - Preset Configuration.
3.35
6125.1651.12.02
Preset Mode
Fig. 3.24 Main Menu - Loading a Preset Page
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00113-A-01-1
After pressing the PRESET softkey in the main menu you can change the preset number.
The radio then checks if the entered preset page is already programmed and can be set. If this is not
the case, the procedure is stopped with the error message Preset invalid.
NOTE:
If the error message is 'Preset does not exist', check if the preset is defined and the correct
active domain in the '1000 Maintenance' menu is selected.
Successful preset settings are displayed
by the symbol
in the headline of the central area
by the number of the selected preset page on the active PRESET softkey,
by an active MANUAL softkey that allows switching to manual mode,
by pushbuttons for selecting the waveform.
The selected softkey PRESET is pressed.
Only the softkeys of the available waveforms are set to active.
In the central area the currently set waveform parameters are displayed.
The type of waveform can only be set with the pushbuttons. The parameters of the waveform cannot
be changed.
6125.1651.12.02
3.36
Preset Mode
Fig. 3.25 Main Menu - Preset Mode
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00114-A-01-1
3.37
6125.1651.12.02
3.3.4
Local / Remote Mode
Local / Remote Mode
A radio can be controlled remotely or locally. The LOCAL button at the front panel allows to switch from
remote to local mode and vice versa.
Fig. 3.26 Overview - Local and Remote Mode
Radio
Access Manager
Connection CU1
remote
Control Unit
CU1
local
Deactivated
Connection
Connection CU2
remote
Control Unit
CU2
local
Deactivated
Connection
Connection CU3
remote
Connected
local
Local
Connection
Control
Unit
CU3
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00109-A-01-1
The connections to control units 1 and 2 are deactivated. Control panel 3 controls the radio. Control
panel 3 requires a connection to the radio for this.
6125.1651.12.02
3.38
Local / Remote Mode
Fig. 3.27 Access Rights in Local Mode
Radio
Access Manager
Control Unit
CU1
Connection CU1
Step 2
Deactivated
Control Unit
CU2
remote
Current status:
Not Connected
local
Connection CU2
remote
Step 3
Deactivated
Current status:
Not Connected
local
Step 1
Connection CU3
Set Local Mode
remote
Current status:
Local Connected
local
Control
Unit
CU3
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00105-A-01-1
Current status: Control unit 1 has access with fixed rights, Control unit 2 has access with monitoring
rights. The radio is in remote mode.
Step 1: By pressing the LOCAL button the radio is set to local mode.
Step 2: Connection to control unit 1 is deactivated.
Step 3: Connection to control unit 2 is deactivated.
New status: The integrated control unit 3 controls the radio in local mode until local mode is finished.
The connection from control unit 1 and 2 to the radio is deactivated.
3.3.4.1
Local Mode
The local control panel controls the radio in local mode. A connection to the radio is necessary for this.
The symbol
at the control unit and the LED at the front panel show that the connected radio is in
local mode.
If the integrated control unit controls the radio in local mode, the external control unit that controlled the
radio before loses control of the radio.
No monitoring of the parameters at the remote control unit is possible. Radio in local mode is displayed in the status line.
3.39
6125.1651.12.02
Local / Remote Mode
Fig. 3.28 Remote Control Unit - Lost Connection because of Local Mode
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00110-A-01-1
If the local mode is finished by pushing the LOCAL button again, the status before having entered the
local mode of the radio (frequency, modulation, power..) is restored again. The remote control unit that
controlled the radio before gets back the control of the radio with the respective rights from beforehand.
In local mode the only possible communication mode is voice. Therefore a headset must be connected
to the plug at the front panel. All remote PTTs and remote codecs (NB1, NB2, WB1, WB2) are deactivated.
The "LOCAL" has no function if one of the following settings is selected on the radio:
IBIT mode
EPM TOD functions active (only for EPM applications)
Load mode
Offline mode
Idle mode
6125.1651.12.02
3.40
Local / Remote Mode
3.3.4.2
Remote Mode
Each remote control unit and the integrated control unit can control the radio as a client with fixed, advanced or monitoring access rights.
The transfer of voice and aata is both possible.
The headset is deactivated if the radio is controlled in remote mode.
PTTs and codecs are all in use.
The inactive LOCAL LED at the radio shows that the radio is in remote mode.
The inactive symbol
at the control unit shows that the connected radio is in remote mode.
Fig. 3.29 Example of a Remote Access
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00100-A-01-1
3.41
6125.1651.12.02
3.3.4.3
A control unit can try to establish a connection to any of the radios that are configured in the IP address
list. In a pulldown menu all configured radios are listed and can be selected. In the following example
the radio with the logical address 046 is available.
Fig. 3.30 Selecting a Radio to be Connected
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00115-A-01-1
Control units and radios are connected with a TCP/IP network. A control unit must therefore know the
IP address of the radio to establish a connection.
These addresses are organised as follows:
Each participant in the network has a logical address that is associated with the physical (IP) address.
Both the logical and the physical address must be unique within the network.
Each control unit has an address list (logical addresses with associated IP addresses). A connection
can only be established to radios that are on this list. For more information refer to 3.6.2 - Configuration
and Status.
By pressing the CONNECT TO RADIO softkey in the main menu, a radio from the list can be selected
to establish a connection. Only the logical addresses of the radios are listed. Press ENT to confirm.
For establishing a connection only the logical address is used.
6125.1651.12.02
3.42
A connection can have 3 status types:
Disconnected
There is no connection to the radio.
The symbol
in the headline shows that the control unit is not connected.
The message Not connected to radio is displayed in the status line. Radio specific softkeys are
not active. By pressing the CONNECT TO RADIO softkey a list of logical addresses of radios
which are configured in the control unit is displayed. If the list is empty or the desired Radio is not
listed, the address list must first be modified. Each control unit has an address list (logical addresses with associated IP addresses). A connection can only be established to radios that are
listed on this list. For more information refer to 3.6.2 - Configuration and Status.
If a logical address is selected, the control unit tries to establish a connection. This corresponds
to the connecting status.
In order to disconnect press the Disconnect button at least half a second. This delay has been
implemented to prevent inadvertent disconnection.
Connecting
The control unit tries to establish a connection to the selected radio with the respective logical
address. This is done as long as the connection is being established or the user interrupts the
procedure.
The symbol
at the control unit shows that the control unit is trying to establish a connection
to the selected Radio.
Connecting to radio is displayed in the status line. Radio specific softkeys are not active.
The connecting status can be very short if the radio is powered on, so that the user does not notice this status.
Connected
In this status the control unit can communicate with the radio.
The symbol
at the control unit shows that the control unit has established a connection to
the selected radio.
If the connection is broken, the control unit changes to the connecting status.
3.43
6125.1651.12.02
Fig. 3.31 Successful Connection to a Radio
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00116-A-01-1
When the radio or the control unit is powered off, the control unit stores the following information:
Logical address of the connected radio
Operational access rights
Last menu displayed
When the radio or the control unit is powered on again, the last status is restored with this information.
If the control unit does not get advanced or fixed rights again, a connection with monitoring rights is
established.
If no connection can be established, the control unit remains in the connecting status.
6125.1651.12.02
3.44
Scenarios
3.4
Scenarios
3.4.1
Guard Signal Reception
There are two emergency frequencies in the supported frequency range of the R&S M3SR Radio:
1: 121.5 MHz in the VHF band
2: 243.0 MHZ in the UHF band
Both frequencies are reserved for emergency calls. An optional guard receiver always checks these
two frequencies irrespective of the used waveform or mode of the radio.
If the radio receives an emergency signal, the SQLG indication in the central area of the control unit,
the G LED on the control unit and the SQL G LED on the front panel (part of the radio) are switched on.
If you receive an emergency call, simply press the EMERGENCY MODE softkey to answer. The band
in which the emergency call was received is automatically preselected. For more information refer to
chapter 3.6.3.6 - Audio Monitoring.
Fig. 3.32 Example of Emergency Mode
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00118-A-01-1
NOTE:
The PTT and codec that are allocated for voice application are used.
3.45
6125.1651.12.02
3.4.2
Scenarios
Fill Gun (Fixed Frequency)
The Fill Gun is an external device used to load the following data into the system:
Presets for the communication
Connect the Fill Gun to the FILL connector at the front side of the radio used to load data.
Fig. 3.33 Radio - Front View
1
1 -
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00120-A-02-1
FILL connector
If the Fill Gun is connected to the FILL connector, the radio automatically changes to load mode.
In load mode no reception or transmission is possible.
The KEY LED is on.
6125.1651.12.02
3.46
Scenarios
Fig. 3.34 Example of Radio in Load Mode
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00121-A-01-1
3.47
6125.1651.12.02
3.5
Waveforms
3.5.1
Fixed Frequency
Waveforms
Different waveforms can be integrated in the system. Fixed frequency is the only waveform that is always available. In fixed frequency, only a fix frequency is used for voice and data transfer.
3.5.1.1
Functions
Communication Modes
NOTE:
Make sure that for all other communication modes other than voice plain the radio is in remote mode!
The following communication modes are available:
Voice Plain
Voice Ciphered (external cipher unit required, option)
Wideband Analog
Wideband Digital Baseband
Wideband Digital Diphase
Voice Communication Mode
The voice plain communication mode is always available without configuration.
The voice cipher communication mode is available after it has been configured in '1145 Resource Management' menu (see Resource Management) and when an external cipher unit is connected.
Wideband Analog Communication Mode
The wideband analog communication mode must first be configured in the resource management.
This mode is used for wideband AM and FM communication with analog data terminals. Wideband audio lines (WB1, WB2) are configurable.
Wideband Digital Baseband and Wideband Digital Diphase Communication Modes
The wideband digital baseband and wideband digital diphase communication modes must first be configured in the resource management.
These modes are used for data communication with digital data terminals (baseband and diphase).
6125.1651.12.02
3.48
Waveforms
Fig. 3.35 Example - Selecting a Communication Mode in Fixed Frequency
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00182-A-01-1
Symbol
indicates the fixed frequency menu.
Frequency
The frequency range depends on the installed option codes.
Modulation
The modulation type can be set as follows:
Amplitude modulation (AM)
Frequency modulation (FM)
Squelch
The squelch function allows suppression of low level audio signals. The squelch level can be configured
and the function can be switched on or off.
TX Offset
If amplitude modulation is set, it is possible to adjust the selected frequency with the offset. This function
enables a radio to suppress interference.
In frequency modulation this function is not available.
3.49
6125.1651.12.02
Waveforms
Channel Spacing
The channel spacing can be set to the following values:
8.33 kHz
12.50 kHz
25.00 kHz
25.00 kHz is standard in the UHF band.
Half Duplex Mode
With the half duplex function different frequencies for receiving and transmitting data can be set. This
function can be switched on and off.
Clipper
The clipper function enables noise reduction during reception in AM mode. This function can be
switched on and off.
Automatic Gain Control
The automatic gain control (AGC) function controls the volume of the loudspeaker and headphone.
With this function the volume is set to a constant value. This function can be switched on and off.
NOTE:
Only available in AM.
Marker Tone
With the MARKER ACK softkey a generated marker tone can be confirmed. After pressing this softkey
the marker tone is suppressed.
Test Tone
With the TONE softkey a test tone (1 kHz) is produced for keying test and monitoring purposes. A tone
is generated as long as the softkey is being pressed.
6125.1651.12.02
3.50
Manual Mode
3.5.1.2
Manual Mode
In manual mode all parameters for fixed frequency can be modified. The central area shows the current
settings of fixed frequency with the respective indicators.
By pressing the MANUAL softkey and then the FIXED FREQUENCY softkey in the main menu, the
fixed frequency menu (Fig. 3.36) is displayed in manual mode.
Fig. 3.36 Fixed Frequency, Main Menu, page 1
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00183-A-01-1
By pressing the NEXT PAGE softkey the second page of the fixed frequency menu (Fig. 3.37) is displayed.
3.51
6125.1651.12.02
Manual Mode
Fig. 3.37 Fixed Frequency, Main Menu, page 2
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00184-A-01-1
The following table gives an overview of the possible parameters and references to more detailed information.
Table 3.2: Fixed Frequency Manual Mode — Settings
Softkey
Type
Submenu
Refer to
Frequency
Editor
/Main/Fixed Frequency/Page 1
Frequency (p. 3.49)
Com Mode
Listbox
Communication
Modes (p. 3.48)
Marker Ack
Active Button
and 2
Marker Tone
(p. 3.50)
Squelch
Toggle
and 2
Squelch (p. 3.49)
Tone
Active Button
and 2
Test Tone (p. 3.50)
Modulation
Toggle
Modulation (p. 3.49)
TX Offset
Listbox
TX Offset (p. 3.49)
Ch Spacing
Listbox
Channel Spacing
(p. 3.50)
Half Duplex
Toggle
Half Duplex Mode
(p. 3.50)
RX AF AGC
Toggle
Automatic Gain Control (p. 3.50)
Clipper
Toggle
Clipper (p. 3.50)
6125.1651.12.02
3.52
Preset Mode
3.5.1.3
Preset Mode
In preset mode only a few parameters for fixed frequency can be modified. The central area shows the
current settings of fixed frequency with the respective indicators.
Fig. 3.38 Example - Fixed Frequency in Preset Mode
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00185-A-01-1
Table 3.3: Fixed Frequency Preset Mode — Settings
softkey
Type
submenu
refer to
Marker Ack
Active Button
and 2
Marker Tone (p. 50)
Squelch
Toggle
and 2
Squelch (p. 49)
Tone
Active Button
and 2
Test Tone (p. 50)
RX AF AGC
Toggle
/Context Menu
Automatic Gain Control (p. 50)
Clipper
Toggle
/Context Menu
Clipper (p. 50)
Power
Listbox
and 2
3.53
6125.1651.12.02
3.5.2
Special Modes
Special Modes
Manual Mode
In manual mode the special modes can be selected from the main menu.
Fig. 3.39 Selection of Special Modes Menu from the Main Menu (Manual Mode)
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00195-A-01-1
In the special modes menu, all special modes are listed and can be selected, provided the special mode
is currently available. If a special mode is not available, the corresponding softkey will be grey and cannot be pressed.
6125.1651.12.02
3.54
Special Modes
Fig. 3.40 Special Mode Menu (Manual Mode)
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00196-A-02-1
3.55
6125.1651.12.02
Special Modes
Preset Mode
In preset mode, a special mode can only be activated if it is the default mode in the preset. If the default
mode of the activated preset is not a special mode, then no SPECIAL MODE softkey is displayed in the
main menu. In this case the only possibility to activate a special mode is to change to manual mode or
to select a preset that has a special mode as its default mode.
Fig. 3.41 Selection of a Special Mode from the Main Menu (Preset Mode)
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00197-A-01-1
6125.1651.12.02
3.56
Link11 / LinkY
3.5.2.1
Link11 / LinkY
NOTE:
Make sure that the radio is in remote mode!
3.5.2.1.1
Introduction
Modern transceivers must be able to play a variety of roles in a communication scenario (multirole radio). Therefore a variety of operating modes can be selected and activated depending on the task at
hand.
Mode Link11/ LinkY is designed for operation on high-frequency (HF) ground wave and can also operate in the UHF band. The UHF range (225 to 399.975 MHz) is used for LOS (line of sight) connections
between stations on the ground, ships and aircrafts.
The Link11 / LinkY data terminal set (DTS) interfaces a tactical data system (TDS) via an optional encryption device. Formatted data for the DTS is generated in the TDS computer to transfer data in Link11
/ LinkY data format to a UHF transceiver. The transceiver receives the data signal via the narrow band
interface, processes the signal and radiates it in the UHF band. The DTS, TDS and the encryption device are third-party equipment.
The Link11 / LinkY waveform is a non-hopping waveform. R&S M3SR radios with activated Link11 /
LinkY mode comply with the applicable standard STANAG 5511.
The following preconditions must be fulfilled for Link11 / LinkY operation of R&S M3SR radios:
The radio employed must be a transceiver capable of the UHF or full frequency range.
The Link11 / LinkY option must be installed.
To configure the transceiver accordingly, Link11 / LinkY must be selected in the resource management.
The radio must be connected to the DTS according to Fig. 3.42.
3.57
6125.1651.12.02
Link11 / LinkY
Fig. 3.42 Connection of Link11 / LinkY Terminal to R&S M3SR Radio
2
1
8
X25.1 AF_TX2_NB_A
7
X25.2 AF_TX2_NB_B
6
X25.3 AF_RX2_NB_A
5
X25.4 AF_RX2_NB_B
4
X25.18 PTT_2
3
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00193-A-01-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
Link11 Terminal
R&S M3SR Radio
Active High
PTT Keyline
Audio Rx Narrowband
Audio Rx Narrowband
Audio Tx Narrowband
Audio Tx Narrowband
Other waveforms such as SECOS, HAVE QUICK I/II, SATURN may be available in addition. The radio
may be extended with modules like guard receiver, circulator, integrated filter, up/down converter or
separated antenna interface.
Selecting the special mode item Link11 / LinkY in the menu 7000 activates this mode. All parameters
(e.g. modulation, AF interface, FM deviation, etc) are automatically set to the values required for the
Link11 / LinkY mode. The transceiver now supports an external Link11 / LinkY DTS. In this mode NB2
is always used as the AF interface and PTT_2 for start of transmission. NB1, WB1 and WB2 are therefore free for further external units and can be configured as required.
6125.1651.12.02
3.58
Link11 / LinkY
3.5.2.1.2
Manual Mode
Fig. 3.43 Link11 / LinkY Menu
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00194-A-01-1
The FREQUENCY softkey can be used to enter the Link11 / LinkY frequency.
Only the UHF band from 225 to 399.975 MHz (in steps of 25 kHz) is available for selection.
The selected Link11 / LinkY frequency is displayed.
3.5.2.1.3
Preset Mode
Presets can be created with the default mode Link11 / LinkY.
The preset page for Link11 / LinkY contains just the Link11 / LinkY frequency (UHF only).
The Link11 / LinkY preset is selected from the main menu. If the conditions for Link11 / LinkY are fulfilled
and the frequency is in the UHF band, the preset is used.
In preset mode, the Link11 / LinkY frequency cannot be changed.
3.59
6125.1651.12.02
3.5.2.2
High Data Rate
High Data Rate
NOTE:
Make sure that the radio is in remote mode!
3.5.2.2.1
Introduction
With the special mode high data rate (= HDR) the R&S M3SR radio can be used for high speed data
communication of several hundred kbit/s over the UHF band.
The functions of modulation, channel coding, FEC and transmit control (Tx/Rx) are performed within
suitable external modems, which provide an IF signal interface of 70 MHz. The occupied bandwidth
may be up to 300 kHz, depending on the hardware model.
The functions of up/down conversion of the IF signal to the UHF band (225 MHz to 399.975 MHz) with
control of transmitter power and receiver gain are performed within the R&S M3SR radio, which has to
be equipped with the module Up/Down Converter R&S UX 4401. This special mode is provided only in
simplex, fixed frequency (FF) operation. The converter is designed for stationary or maritime applications and burst transmissions (TDMA channel access), enabling interoperability with several proprietary
external modems.
The R&S UX 4401 may be integrated in the factory or added by installing the HDR Upgrade Kit R&S
UX 4401-U. The converter can be combined with other radio modules such as Guard Receiver R&S
ET 4400G, separate Antenna Interface R&S GI 4403, circulator, integrated filter R&S FD 4430 or hopping processor. Therefore it can be added to all R&S M3SR transceiver versions with or without Link11/
LinkY option. In contrast to the special mode Link11 / LinkY, the HDR mode does not require an option
code.
HDR cannot be used in VHF only radios (VHF option installed) or receiver/transmitter only configurations (ET.. / ST..).
When the radio is operated in the HDR mode, then the power is fixed for the power levels high/medium/
low to ensure a high quality transmit signal with waveforms requesting a high crest factor. If an external
amplifier is connected, this amplifier is set to bypass to avoid degradation of linearity caused by the external amplifier.
External filters like R&S FT 213A or R&S FD 430 are supported as in fixed frequency mode.
In the case that the radio is operated in modes other than HDR, the Converter R&S UX 4401 is switched
to bypass and the other modules are processing the waveform.
Requirements for using HDR:
The radio is a transceiver (XT.. / XD..).
The UHF frequency band can be used (option UHF or full frequency).
The Up/Down Converter R&S UX 4401 is installed.
The following preparations have to be made to use HDR:
The external modem has to be connected according to Fig. 3.44.
R&S UX 4401 has to be configured according to the modem/waveform requirements.
PTT resource has to be selected and HDR has to be activated.
Radio has to be set to remote mode.
6125.1651.12.02
3.60
High Data Rate
Fig. 3.44 Connection of an External HDR Modem
1
2
4
3
5
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00191-A-02-1
1
2
3
4
5
-
R&S M3SR Radio with option R&S UX 4401 Up/Down Converter
To antenna
PTT signal
70 MHz IF signal
HDR modem
For configuration of the converter module and the resource management of HDR please refer to
3.6.3.4 - Option Management.
3.61
6125.1651.12.02
3.5.2.2.2
High Data Rate
Manual Mode
Fig. 3.45 High Data Rate Menu
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00192-A-01-1
The FREQUENCY softkey can be used to enter the HDR frequency.
Only the UHF band from 225 to 399.975 MHz (in steps of 25 kHz) is available for selection.
The selected HDR frequency is displayed.
Squelch and RSSI indication is only available if RX Gain Control is set to ON.
3.5.2.2.3
Preset Mode
Presets can be created with the default mode high data rate.
The preset page for high data rate contains just the HDR frequency (UHF only).
The HDR preset is selected from the main menu. If the conditions for HDR are fulfilled and the frequency is in the UHF band, the preset is used.
In preset mode, the HDR frequency cannot be changed.
6125.1651.12.02
3.62
Emergency Operation
3.5.3
Emergency Operation
In emergency mode, emergency calls can be transmitted and received. This function is available and
ready to be used at any time.
The following frequencies are reserved for emergency calls:
1: 121.5 MHz in the VHF band
2: 243.0 MHZ in the UHF band
If only one of the frequency bands (VHF or UHF) is available, emergency operation is restricted to this
frequency band.
NOTE:
The emergency mode can be used both in the manual mode and in the preset mode.
Fig. 3.46 Example - Emergency Mode in Preset Mode
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00137-A-01-1
3.63
6125.1651.12.02
Emergency Operation
Fig. 3.47 Example - Emergency Mode in Manual Mode
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00118-A-01-1
By pressing the EMERGENCY MODE softkey the emergency mode menu is displayed.
Symbol
indicates the emergency mode menu.
NOTE:
In emergency mode only the band can be selected, the power can be modified and the
squelch can be toggled from On to Off and vice versa.
6125.1651.12.02
3.64
Preset Scan Mode
3.5.4
Preset Scan Mode
3.5.4.1
Introduction
Preset Scan is used to check if traffic is going on in selected radio channels (including EPM channels).
As a result only a limited number of radios is necessary to monitor several channels. The user can enter
a start and an end preset number (softkeys BEGIN SCAN and END SCAN) to define a range of preset
numbers between 0 and 199, which are successively and cyclically activated when preset scan is started. The Search Time parameter (softkey SEARCH) defines how long the radio shall remain on the selected preset and wait for a signal until the next preset in the list is activated if no signal is detected. Any
search time in the range between 1 s and 60 s can be set. The preset scan stops and the radio remains
on the currently active preset when a signal above the squelch threshold (or synchronisation sequence
in EPM modes) is detected or when the user deliberately deactivates the preset scan by pressing STOP
SCAN or leaving the menu. As for manual preset activation, preset scan uses the currently selected
preset domain. Selecting the domain for preset scanning is not possible in the PRESET SCAN menu,
for this enter the MAINTENANCE menu (softkey ACTIVE DOM).
When preset scan has stopped because a busy channel was detected, the parameter Auto Continue
(softkey AUTO CONT) determines if and after what time the radio shall automatically continue scanning
after the squelch (or synchronisation) has become inactive. The Auto Continue function can be
switched off or adjusted between 10 and 60 seconds in 10-s increments. When Auto Continue is off,
the radio always remains on the busy preset channel, even if the signal is no longer present.
In addition, the preset scan menu shows the last found busy preset channel. This preset can be activated by softkey. If this is done while scanning is in progress, scanning automatically stops and the preset where the squelch (or synchronisation) was detected is activated.
For scanning only those presets are considered which are contained in the list of active presets. The
radio attempts to activate the preset with its default page. If this fails, it moves on to the next preset.
Only the default pages of the presets are activated, switching to another page is not possible. Error
messages to indicate that there are no presets in the defined range (gaps) or that a preset could not be
activated (e.g. due to invalid parameters in the preset) are not produced in preset scan mode. The radio
simply tries to activate the next preset.
When preset scan is stopped the currently selected preset remains active. To resume scanning there
are two possibilities: Continue Scan or Start Scan. After power-up only Start Scan is possible. If preset
scan has already been active since the radio was last powered up, scanning may be resumed with
CONTINUE SCAN. For Start Scan and Continue Scan the set parameters are used. If due to a parameter change the next preset to be activated is out of the range defined with BEGIN SCAN and END
SCAN, scanning resumes with the preset that was set with BEGIN SCAN, so this is equivalent to Start
Scan.
When PTT is set while scan is running, the scan process is stopped.
Reception of a guard receiver signal during preset scan is indicated by the SQL G LED on the front
panel of the radio, by the G LED on the control unit and by the SQLG indicator in the preset scan menu.
When a guard receiver signal is detected, key Menu/Home can be used to change to the main menu
and from there to emergency mode to answer the emergency call.
Conditions where an ongoing preset scan is stopped:
Detection of a busy channel (squelch or sync)
Use of softkey STOP SCAN or GP2PP command
Leaving the menu
Loss of connection to control unit or remote client which started the scan process
3.65
6125.1651.12.02
Preset Scan Mode
Loss of operational access rights of control unit or remote client which started the scan process
Change of local/remote status of the radio
Change of presets (adding, removing, editing, manually activating a preset or selecting manual
operation, changing the preset page, changing the domain)
Use of signal LAST SIGNAL or GB2PP command
Activation of PTT
All preset scan parameters are stored, so when the radio is powered down and up again, scanning can
be started with the stored parameters.
Initial values of scan parameters when the radio is started up the very first time or when the memory is
reset:
Begin Scan: first preset in the list, 0 and deactivated if list is empty
End Scan: last preset in the list, 199 and deactivated if list is empty
Search Time: 1 s
Auto Continue: Off
6125.1651.12.02
3.66
Preset Scan Mode
3.5.4.2
Activating Preset Scan
In order to activate the preset scan, operational access, i.e. advanced or fixed, or a local session is required.
The menu 0500 PRESET SCAN can be entered from the main menu (0000 MAIN MENU, see
Fig. 3.48) by pressing the PRESET softkey a bit longer (500 ms), provided that a connection to the radio has been established and the control unit has operational access or a local session is running.
Fig. 3.48 Main Menu - Example of Manual Mode
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00112-A-01-1
Alternatively, the preset scan menu can be entered by pressing softkey PRESET SCAN in menu 9000
CONTEXT MENU (see Fig. 3.49), which is opened by pressing ENT for some time.
3.67
6125.1651.12.02
Preset Scan Mode
Fig. 3.49 Context Menu
1
2
4
3
ICN-4F-D-231000-R-D0894-00180-A-01-1
1
2
3
4
-
Softkey BACK
Softkey PRESET SCAN
6125.1651.12.02
3.68
Preset Scan Mode
Menu 0500 PRESET SCAN (see Fig. 3.50) allows to set parameters or activate functions as follows:
Begin Scan (preset number x where scanning shall start)
End Scan (preset number y which shall be the last to be activated before restarting with x; it is
ensured that 0 x 199 and y x)
Search (search time in seconds, from 1 to 60)
Auto Cont (off, or time in seconds, from 10 to 60 in increments of 10)
Start Scan (starts preset scan with preset number x)
Stop Scan (stops scanning)
Continue Scan (continues scanning when due to squelch or sync a busy channel was detected
and scanning was consequently stopped, or after scanning was stopped manually)
Last Signal (terminates the scanning process and activates that preset where a signal above the
squelch threshold or a synchronisation sequence was last detected)
Display Presets (shows the list of currently defined presets after scanning was stopped; this facilitates the selection of parameters Begin Scan and End Scan)
Invalid Presets (shows the reason why an invalid (red) preset is invalid). If all presets are valid,
this softkey is disabled, otherwise it is enabled and can be used to open an editor where the
number of an invalid preset can be entered. After confirmation with ENT the reason for invalidity
is displayed.
Fig. 3.50 Preset Scan Menu
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00205-A-01-1
NOTE:
An entry in red means that the default mode is not possible with the current software and
hardware. This preset cannot be activated.
3.69
6125.1651.12.02
Preset Scan Mode
Running preset scan
Fig. 3.51 Running Scan
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00206-A-01-1
Preset scan can be stopped by the presence of a signal.
Fig. 3.52 Stopped Scan
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00207-A-01-1
6125.1651.12.02
3.70
Preset Scan Mode
3.5.4.3
Limitations of Preset Scan
With multi-application devices delays will occur due to hardware design when switching over e.g. between two EPM applications, since for each change the other application must be loaded to the protection processor. The real time needed to completely scan a selected preset range therefore is composed
of the loading time plus the set search time. Where scanning is to be performed on several presets containing both EPM application X and EPM application Y, the user can minimise the overall loading time
by arranging the presets in such a way that e.g. first all presets of EPM application X are scanned, followed by all presets of EPM application Y. In this way only two loading processes per scan cycle are
required altogether. Loading typically takes approximately 3 seconds before operation can continue.
When the radio is set to local mode, only those presets are included in the scan process which have a
voice mode as communication mode, since local mode only supports voice communication. So it may
occur that less presets are scanned than in remote mode. No warnings are produced.
When a fill device is connected and load mode becomes active as a result, a running preset scan is
stopped. While load mode is active preset scan cannot be started.
Scanning is performed with the parameters defined in the preset. Preset parameters which can be temporarily overwritten cannot be changed while scanning is in progress. One possibility, however, is to go
to the main menu, thus terminating the preset scan, and to change the modifiable parameters here.
3.71
6125.1651.12.02
3.6
Maintenance
Maintenance
This chapter describes the maintenance tasks for the radio and for the control unit. Built-in tests allow
a comfortable error search in case of malfunction. The radio and the control unit can be adapted to customer-specific requirements concerning the waveforms and preset values as well as user-specific adaptations for daily use. The option management for additional features is also explained.
3.6.1
Control Unit and Radio
All described built-in tests and all configuration procedures can be executed with an internal as well as
an external control unit if the radio does not have an integrated control unit. The following description
of maintenance tasks does not distinguish between an internal and an external control unit.
3.6.1.1
Troubleshooting
In order to detect device and system errors, built-in tests are implemented in the system. These builtin test functions allow an exact analysis of the system. The results support the service team to make a
decision of how to proceed in order to solve the problem. All tests are implemented for both radio and
control unit, therefore the information given below generally applies to both units.
3.6.1.1.1
PBIT
The power-on built-in test is performed automatically after the system has been switched on.
3.6.1.1.2
CBIT
Specific parameters of the system are tested continuously. Any errors that have occurred are listed in
the error list. The CBIT is started by pressing softkey "CBIT" in menu "1110 Radio Maintenance" (radio)
or "1300 Control Unit Maintenance" (control unit).
6125.1651.12.02
3.72
Maintenance
Fig. 3.53 Examples of CBIT Error List
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00139-A-02-1
NOTE:
Only current errors are displayed in the CBIT error list. Corrected errors are removed from
the list.
The continuous built-in test has the following features:
The functions of the radio are not restricted during the tests.
The current errors/warnings are shown.
Error messages are displayed in a message box.
Error messages must be acknowledged.
Warning messages are displayed for not more than 5 sec. Then the message box disappears.
But this message box can also be closed at once.
3.73
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.1.1.3
Maintenance
IBIT
The initiated built-in test is used for equipment diagnostics (LEDs, modules, wiring..). This test helps to
localize failures and supports maintenance. The IBIT is started by pressing softkey "IBIT" in menu
"1110 Radio Maintenance" (radio) or "1300 Control Unit Maintenance" (control unit).
Both the control unit and the radio can be tested separately.
The Initiated built-in test has the following features:
The function of the radio is deactivated during this test.
The test procedures are very extensive.
The test is started by a user, but finished independently by the radio.
Faulty tests are displayed.
The current status is displayed as long as the tests are performed.
While IBIT is running, the selection bar moves downward in the list, allowing always the last error
selected to be viewed by pressing softkey Details.
The IBIT cannot be started if X23.6 (~INHIBIT_TX) orr X23.7 (~INHIBIT_RX) is set. The status
line shows the message "Cannot start: Tx/Rx Inhibit".
If input X23.6 (~INHIBIT_TX) or X23.7 (~INHIBIT_RX) is activated while IBIT is running, the status line shows the message "IBIT successfully finished" and IBIT is aborted.
Activating the following signals prior to or during IBIT results in IBIT error messages:
• ~TX_INHIBIT0 (X27.4)
NOTE:
Fixed access rights are needed to perform an IBIT test of the radio. However, testing the
control unit is always possible. IBIT can be stopped any time (press CANCEL IBIT or UP
softkey or MENU HOME button).
6125.1651.12.02
3.74
Maintenance
Fig. 3.54 Examples of IBIT Test
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00140-A-02-1
3.75
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.1.2
Maintenance
Error List
Errors of the radio are displayed in menu "1120 Radio Error List", errors of the control unit are listed in
menu "1320 Control Unit Error List".
The error list is called up by pressing softkey "Errors" in menu "1100 Radio Maintenance" or "1300 Control Unit Maintenance" (no screenshot for control unit available).
Fig. 3.55 Example of Radio Error List
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00141-A-02-1
With the adjusting knob you can select an error. By pressing the DETAILS softkey more information
about this error is displayed.
The radio error list or control unit error list shows a history of the errors.
The errors are displayed until they are cleared.
By pressing the CLEAR ERROR LIST softkey all errors apart from the current ones are deleted
from the list.
The error list is not refreshed automatically.
By pressing the REFRESH ERROR LIST softkey the error list is updated.
6125.1651.12.02
3.76
Maintenance
Fig. 3.56 Example of Radio Error Details
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00142-A-02-1
In the GENERAL folder, the error code and the type of error are displayed.
In the ERROR DESCRIPTION folder, a description of the error and its relevance are displayed.
In the CONTEXT folder, the settings of the radio at the time when the error occurred are displayed.
3.77
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.2
This chapter describes how to get information about the integrated hardware and software as well as
how to configure a radio in a network with a logical name and an IP address.
3.6.2.1
Inventory
This menu gives an overview of all installed hardware, software and firmware components.
By pressing the INVENTORY softkey in the radio maintenance menu, the integrated hardware and software is displayed.
NOTE:
After loading a new software application, the updated inventory is shown only after the relevant application has been started.
Fig. 3.57 Example of Radio Inventory
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00143-A-02-1
The module type, the module name and the number of the slot where the module is installed are listed.
The following items are listed:
DEV — device identifier
SWM — software module identifier
SW — software identifier
FW — firmware identifier
HWM — hardware module identifier
HW — hardware identifier
NOTE:
For inventory items displayed in grey, there is no detailed information.
6125.1651.12.02
3.78
For a module, more information can be obtained by pressing the DETAILS softkey. If this softkey is
grey, no further information is available.
Fig. 3.58 Example of Radio Inventory Details
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00144-A-02-1
3.79
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.2.2
Address Configuration
The addressing of each radio and each control unit is done via Internet Protocol (IP). We recommend
to change the setting for each device in the following order:
Own IP address: IP address of the device, i.e. 192.168.082.20
This address must be unique within a net.
Logical address: A freely selectable address from 000 to 999 for a device
This address must be unique within a net.
Subnet mask: A subnet mask, i.e. 255.255.255.0, must be defined for a device.
This subnet mask must be the same for all devices within a net.
Gateway address:
With the GATEWAY softkey you can specify if a gateway shall be used. If it is switched to 'on' it
is possible to enter a gateway address by pressing the GATEWAY ADDRESS softkey.
For more information refer to 3.6.3.6 - Audio Monitoring.
NOTE:
For the configuration of a complex network, detailed knowledge concerning IP networks is
required. Such knowledge is not imparted by this documentation. Please refer to appropriate technical literature, if necessary.
By pressing the ADDRESS LIST softkey in the radio maintenance menu (second page) or the control
unit maintenance menu, the corresponding address configuration menu is displayed.
Fig. 3.59 Example of IP Network Configuration for a Control Unit
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00145-A-02-1
6125.1651.12.02
3.80
The available radios can be entered in a list at the control unit. Only radios that are entered in this list
can be connected.
Fig. 3.60 Example of IP Address list of a Control Unit
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00146-A-02-1
With the ADD ADDRESS softkey you can add an IP address of a radio.
With the DELETE ADDRESS softkey you can delete an IP address of a radio which is no longer available.
With the SORT ADDRESSES softkey the address list is ordered by the logical address.
With the SELECT QOS softkey the quality of the connection between the control unit and the corresponding radio can be selected. This parameter adjusts the time until a broken connection (i.e. unplugged network cable) is detected. If a control unit is connected to a radio via a fast LAN network, the
value A should be selected. For connection with small bandwidth and/or a long round trip time (also for
two LAN networks connected with a slow serial link) the value D should be selected.
For saving the changes in the address list use the SAVE TO CTRL UNIT softkey.
The schematics of two networks that are connected via a router are shown in the following figure. There
is no connection to the third network.
3.81
6125.1651.12.02
Fig. 3.61 Example of 2 Connected Networks
Net 1
CU1
R1
R: 192.168.52.47
C: 192.168.52.48
CU2
CU3
C: 192.168.52.51
CU4
R2
R: 192.168.52.49
C: 192.168.52.50
C: 192.168.52.52
Gateway
192.168.52.1
Subnetmask
255.255.255.0
Net 3
192.168.52.1
Gateway
off
Router
192.168.53.1
CU7
Net 2
R5
Gateway
CU8
192.168.53.1
CU5
R3
R6
R: 192.168.53.50
C: 192.168.53.51
CU6
C: 192.168.53.52
R4
R: 192.168.53.53
Subnetmask
255.255.255.0
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00147-A-02-1
The addresses for each system are defined in the schematics.
6125.1651.12.02
3.82
Some possible connections are:
The control unit CU1 (net 1) is connected to radio R2 (net 1) within net 1.
The control unit CU4 (net 1) is connected to radio R1 (net 1) within net 1.
The control unit CU2 (net 1) is connected to radio R4 (net 2) via a router.
The control unit CU6 (net 2) is connected to radio R1 (net 1) via a router.
A connection to net 3 is not possible because the gateway is not set in this net.
3.83
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.3
Radio
Radio
This documentation describes how to set the time and how to restore the factory settings of the radio.
3.6.3.1
Radio Time and Date
The time and date which are entered here are only used for the time stamp in the error list.
Fig. 3.62 Setting the Radio Time and Date
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00149-A-01-1
By pressing the RADIO TIME softkey on the second page of the radio maintenance menu the radio time
menu is displayed.
With the RADIO TIME and RADIO DATE softkeys you can enter the time and date manually.
The elapsed time shows the total operational hours of the radio.
6125.1651.12.02
3.84
Default Setting
3.6.3.2
Default Setting
The user has the possibility to restore the factory settings (see Table 3.4). These settings match the
settings with which the radio was delivered.
Fig. 3.63 Restoring the Factory Settings
ICN-4F-E-231000-R-D0894-00148-A-01-1
By pressing the DEFAULT SETTINGS softkey on the first page of the radio maintenance menu you can
restore the factory settings of the radio. Pressing DEFAULT SETTINGS opens a dialog where you have
to confirm with ENT or cancel with ESC/CLR.
Table 3.4: Default Settings
Radio Modes
Audio Monitoring - Guard
Off
Local Mode
Off
Manual Mode
Activated
Active Waveform
Fixed Frequency
Power Level
High
Audio Monitoring - Marker
Disabled
Fixed Frequency
Squelch
On
AGC
Off
3.85
6125.1651.12.02
Default Setting
Clipper
Off
TRx Simplex Frequency
310 000 000 Hz
(UHF and VHF/
UHF)
118 000 000 Hz
(VHF)
Rx Duplex Frequency
310 000 000 Hz
(UHF and VHF/
UHF)
118 000 000 Hz
(VHF)
Tx Duplex Frequency
311 000 000 Hz
(UHF and VHF/
UHF)
118 000 000 Hz
(VHF)
Channel Spacing
25 kHz
Tx Offset
Off
Modulation
AM
Communication Mode
Voice Plain
Half Duplex
Off
Emergency
Band
UHF
Link 11/Y
Frequency
225 000 000 Hz
High Data Rate
Frequency
225 000 000 Hz
Resource Management
Voice
WB
Digital
KY58
Off
Audio Conf NB RX Level
0 dB
Audio Conf NB TX Level
0 dB
PTT
PTT_1 Line
Narrow Band
NB1
WB Digital
Off
PTT
PTT_1 Low
Wideband
WB1
6125.1651.12.02
3.86
Default Setting
Link11
Off
0 dB
Audio Conf NB TX Level
0 dB
PTT
PTT_2 High
Narrow Band
NB2
WB Analog
Off
Audio Conf WB RX Level
0 dB
Audio Conf WB TX Level
0 dB
PTT
PTT_1 Low
Wideband
WB1
Async Data
Off
Ser Interface
Serial 1
Ser Interface Config Bitrate
38 400
Ser Interface Config Stop Bit
1
Ser Interf Parity
None
Sync Data
Off
Ser Interface
Serial 1
Guard
Off
0 dB
Narrow Band
NB2
High
Data
Rate
High Data Rate
Off
PTT
PTT_1 Low
Serial
GB2PP
GB2PP
Off
Ser Interface
Serial 2
Ser Interface Config Bitrate
38 400
Ser Interface Config Stop Bit
1
Ser Interf Parity
None
Link11
WB Analog
Async
Data
Sync
Data
Guard
Monitoring
Receiver
Clipper Level
90 %
Attack Time
10 ms
Decay Time
100 ms
Sensitivity
Low Noise
3.87
6125.1651.12.02
Default Setting
Overload
On
Squelch Level
10 dB
Transmitter
AM Modulation Level
90 %
Used PA
Internal
Used Filter
None
Internal Amplifier
Power Level AM Low
3W
Power Level AM Medium
10 W
Power Level AM High
30 W
Power Level FM Low
5W
Power Level FM Medium
10 W
Power Level FM High
100 W
R&S VD 480L
Power Level AM Low
5W
20 W
Power Level AM High
30 W
Power Level FM Low
10 W
25 W
Power Level FM High
50 W
PA UHF LOW
Off
PA UHF MED
Off
PA UHF HIGH
Off
R&S FD 430
Power Level AM Low
2W
5W
Power Level AM High
10 W
Power Level FM Low
5W
10 W
Power Level FM High
15 W
R&S FD 4420
Power Level AM Low
6125.1651.12.02
2W
3.88
Default Setting
5W
Power Level AM High
10 W
Power Level FM Low
5W
10 W
Power Level FM High
15 W
R&S VU 220L
Power Level AM Low
2W
10 W
Power Level AM High
25 W
Power Level FM Low
5W
20 W
Power Level FM High
35 W
PA UHF LOW
Off
PA UHF MED
Off
PA UHF HIGH
Off
Synthesizer
TX Deviation NB
3.5 kHz
TX Deviation WB
6.3 kHz
TX Deviation Link11
20 kHz
Radio Platform
Reference Out Frequency
10 MHz
Clock Source
OCXO
Reference In Imp
Off
Power Supply
Main
External Reference In
Off
AFI
Marker Volume
-1.5 dB
Guard Volume
0.0 dB
Sidetone Volume
-6.0 dB
ALC Configuration
Tx ALC Attack Time
30 ms
Tx ALC Decay Time
300 ms
3.89
6125.1651.12.02
Default Setting
Tx ALC
On
Tx ALC Level
0.0 dB
I/O Mapping
All pins are reset to be low active. In addition, the sources of all pins are set to NONE except for:
X23.4
NOGO
X25.13
Squelch Main
X25.19
Squelch Guard
X25.20
Carrier
X26.13
Squelch Main
X26.19
Squelch Guard
X26.24
Zeroize (High polarity)
Guard Receiver
Squelch Level UHF
10 dB
Squelch Level VHF
10 dB
Overload
On
HPP
Emgcy Clear Battery Timeout
Never
Up/Down Converter
Squelch
No squelch
Rx Out Ctrl
On
Rx Out Level
-20 dBm
Tx In Level
-10 dBm
Rx Gain
10 dB
PTT Map
V-WBA
PTT Configuration
Timeout
Off
Timeout Time
30 s
6125.1651.12.02
3.90
Radio Modules
3.6.3.3
Radio Modules
Each module has configuration data that are displayed in this area. These configuration data are stored
in a non-volatile memory.
3.6.3.3.1
Synthesizer
In the first folder the current configuration data for the synthesizer module are displayed.
Fig. 3.64 Example of Module Synthesizer
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00150-A-02-1
By pressing the TX DEV FM NB softkey you can set the value for the FM deviation narrowband in the
range from 1 kHz to 20 kHz.
By pressing the TX DEV FM WB softkey you can set the value for the FM deviation wideband in the
By pressing the TX DEV FM LK11 softkey you can set the value for the FM deviation TX Link 11 in the
By pressing the TX DEV TRIM softkey you can set the value for the fine tuning of the FM deviation in
the range from -30 % to +30 %.
3.91
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.3.3.2
Radio Modules
Receiver
In the next folder the configuration of the receiver is displayed.
Fig. 3.65 Example of Module Receiver
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00151-A-01-1
By pressing the SQUELCH LEVEL S/N softkey you can set the response threshold of the S/N squelch
in the range from 6 to 20 dB.
By pressing the INPUT softkey you can select the antenna input.
By pressing the CLIPPER LEV softkey you can set the clipper level. The clipper level is used for noise
clipping after AM voice demodulation.
By pressing the SENSITIVITY softkey you set the sensitivity (low noise, low distortion) of the receiver.
By pressing the ATTACK softkey you can set the AF AGC attack time. This is the time the receiver
needs for controlling the AF output signal to its nominal output level, when the modulation depth has
changed from 10 % to 90 %.
By pressing the DECAY softkey you can set the AF AGC decay time. This is the time the receiver needs
for controlling the AF output signal to its nominal output level, when the modulation depth has changed
from 90 % to 10 %.
By pressing the OVERLOAD softkey you can toggle the overload CBIT warnings for the receiver on/off.
6125.1651.12.02
3.92
Radio Modules
3.6.3.3.3
Guard Receiver
In the next folder the configuration of the guard receiver is displayed.
Fig. 3.66 Example of Module Guard Receiver
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00152-A-02-1
By pressing the SQUELCH LEVEL VHF softkey you set the squelch level for the VHF band in the range
of 6 dB to 20 dB.
By pressing the SQUELCH LEVEL UHF softkey you set the squelch level for the UHF band in the range
of 6 dB to 20 dB.
By pressing the OVERLOAD softkey you can toggle the overload CBIT warnings for the receiver on/off.
3.93
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.3.3.4
Radio Modules
Protection Processor (if installed)
In the next folder the configuration of the protection processor is displayed.
Fig. 3.67 Example of Module Protection Processor
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00153-A-02-1
By pressing the EMGCY CLR BAT TIMEOUT softkey you set the time after power off when the emergency clear for the security data is performed.
1
Press softkey EMGCY CLR BAT TIMEOUT.
2
Select the desired time.
3
Press key ENT.
4
Switch the radio off.
5
Switch the radio on (boot process must be terminated).
6
The function is performed after the selected time when the radio is powered off again.
Now the setting is effective.
6125.1651.12.02
3.94
Radio Modules
3.6.3.3.5
Power Amplifier
3.6.3.3.5.1 Configuration of Power Amplifier
CAUTION
If the following instructions are disregarded or a power amplifier / filter different from
the selected one is connected, the power amplifier / filter can be seriously damaged.
1
If required, switch the radio off.
2
If required, disconnect the external power amplifier / filter.
3
If required, the switch radio on.
4
Press the USED PA softkey (see Fig. 3.68) to select the desired power amplifier / filter.
5
Press the PA CONFIG softkey (see Fig. 3.69) to configure the power levels for the selected power amplifier / filter.
6
If required, switch the radio off.
7
If required, connect the selected power amplifier / filter.
In the next folder the configuration of the power amplifier is displayed.
3.95
6125.1651.12.02
Radio Modules
Fig. 3.68 Example of Module Power Amplifier
ICN-4F-D-231000-R-D0894-00154-A-01-1
By pressing the AM MOD LEV softkey you can set the AM modulation depth.
By pressing the USED PA softkey you can define whether an external power amplifier is connected,
and you can select the type.
By pressing the PA CONFIG softkey you can define and switch on/off the power levels (low, medium,
high) for AM and FM modulation. The minimum output power is 1 W. Although values below 1 W can
be entered and are then indicated as such, they will remain ineffective. That is, if you enter a value between 0.1 W and 0.9 W, the effective setting will always be 1 W.
6125.1651.12.02
3.96
Radio Modules
Fig. 3.69 Example of Module Power Amplifier Configuration
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00200-A-01-1
3.97
6125.1651.12.02
Radio Modules
3.6.3.3.5.2 Configuration of Filter
CAUTION
When connecting an external filter make sure that the correct external filter has been
configured beforehand using the USED FILTER softkey in menu 1150 Radio Modules, folder Power Amplifier. Otherwise the connected filter may be destroyed when
activating an EPM procedure with frequency hopping, or when powering the radio up
in a status where such a procedure is already active.
Configure the filter in the radio menu before connecting it. Afterwards the filter
should only be connected to the radio when the latter is powered down. Likewise disconnect the filter only when the radio is powered down, and only then set the Used
Filter parameter to None. If you fail to adhere to this sequence, the filter can be destroyed if an EPM procedure with frequency hopping has already been active on the
radio when starting the configuration.
To the radio external filters and amplifiers can be connected. Via pins of connector X27 these devices
are permanently kept informed of the current frequency of the radio. When an EPM procedure with frequency hopping is used, the current hopping frequency is output at the pins. This information is required
by the external amplifiers, whereas some external motor-tuned filters may be damaged when receiving
new frequency commands in a quick succession, as is the case with hopping EPM procedures. To
avoid this, the radio must be informed which filter is connected, so if necessary it can deactivate the
frequency PINs to protect the filter.
By pressing the USED FILTER softkey you can define whether an external filter is connected and you
can select the type.
Reaction of the filter depending on the filter setting:
Used filter
Reaction of the radio
None
The frequency pins of connector X27 are always activated.
R&S FT 213A
The frequency pins of X27 are deactivated in EMP procedures with
frequency hopping.
6125.1651.12.02
3.98
Radio Modules
3.6.3.3.6
Platform
In the next folder the configuration of the platform is displayed.
Fig. 3.70 Example of Module Platform
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00155-A-01-1
By pressing the REF OUT softkey you can select the clock frequency for the reference output.
By pressing the CLOCK SRC softkey you can select the active oscillator which provides the radio with
the internal clock.
By pressing the PWR SUP MAIN softkey you can select the monitoring of the battery or the mains in
the CBIT test.
By pressing the VCXO softkey you can set the tuning value for the VCXO frequency. In normal operation mode this setting is not relevant.
By pressing the TCXO softkey you can set the calibration value for the TCXO oscillator.
By pressing the OCXO softkey you can set the calibration value for the OCXO oscillator.
By pressing the REF IN IMP softkey you can set an input impedance on the clock reference input.
By pressing the EXT IN REF softkey you can connect the radio to the clock refernce input.
Possible values:
ON: The radio synchronizes all internal clocks to the clock reference input.
OFF: The radio uses the calibration values for the internal clocks.
3.99
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.3.3.7
Radio Modules
Audio Interface
In the next folder the configuration of the audio interface is displayed.
Fig. 3.71 Example of Module Audio Interface
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00156-A-02-1
By pressing the MARKER VOLUME softkey you can set the volume of the marker signal.
By pressing the GUARD VOLUME softkey you can set the volume of the guard signal.
By pressing the SIDETONE VOLUME softkey you can set the volume of the narrowband sidetone.
By pressing the ALC CONFIG softkey you can set the values for the automatic level control.
By pressing the CODEC CALIBRATION softkey you can set the values for the audio lines (NB1, NB2,
WB1, WB2).
CAUTION
Codec calibration values are radio-specific. Do not change these values!
Exception: After changing the battery on the platform the codecs
need to be calibrated. For instructions see service documentation.
6125.1651.12.02
3.100
Radio Modules
Fig. 3.72 Example of Radio Modules CODEC Calibration
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00201-A-01-1
Fig. 3.73 Example of Radio Modules ALC Configuration
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00202-A-01-1
3.101
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.3.3.8
Radio Modules
Up/Down Converter R&S UX 4401
In the next folder the configuration of the Up/Down Converter R&S UX 4401 is displayed.
Fig. 3.74 Example of Up/Down Converter R&S UX 4401
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00187-A-01-1
By pressing the RX OUT CTRL softkey you can toggle the Rx output level control on/off.
When the Rx output level control is on, the Rx output level (to the external high data rate modem) is set
according to the RX OUT LEV setting, i.e. automatic level control is used to maintain a constant output
level. In this case the RX GAIN softkey is grey.
When the Rx output level control is off, a constant Rx gain is used, according to the RX GAIN setting,
i.e. no level control is used. In this case the RX OUT LEV softkey is grey.
By pressing the SQUELCH softkey you can set the up/down converter squelch level.
The up/down converter sensitivity (low noise or low distortion) and antenna input (Rx or Rx/Tx) are set
according to the same parameters in the receiver (see Receiver (Receiver (p. 3.92))).
6125.1651.12.02
3.102
Option Management
3.6.3.4
Option Management
By pressing the OPTIONS softkey on the second page of the radio maintenance menu the installed
options as well as the serial number are listed.
Fig. 3.75 Example of Installed Options
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00157-A-02-1
NOTE:
Only functionality for which an option has been installed can be used.
3.103
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.3.5
Resource Management
Resource Management
To use the applications of a radio, resources must be assigned to an application. For example WB analog can reserve wideband 2 (WB2) with the keyline PTT_2. If an application is assigned to a resource,
a second application cannot use this resource. The figure below shows the possible assignments.
x
x
WB2
x
x
KY58 Baseband or
Diphase
x
WB Digital Baseband
x
x
WB Digital Diphase
x
x
Link 11 / Y
Notes
x
x
Wideband Analog
WB1
NB2
NB1
Audio Lines
PTT_2
PTT_1
Voice Plain
Voice Ciphered
PTT_2L
Keylines
PTT_1L
Application
Serial Interface
Table 3.5: Assignments in Resource Management
x
x
Guard
External Modem
x
High Data Rate
x
External Modem
Serial GB2PP
2
NOTE:
Access to the resource management is only possible if the radio is in offline mode.
Set the radio to an offline mode by pressing the OFFLINE softkey on the first page of the radio maintenance menu. A fixed session is necessary to do so.
By pressing the RESOURCE MGMT softkey on the first page of the radio maintenance menu, the resource management menu is displayed.
For Voice Plain NB1 or NB2 is used as a matter of principle. Therefore no separate Guard Audio Line
is available when Link 11 is active (although GRx Audio is still available at the headset connector).
6125.1651.12.02
3.104
Resource Management
Fig. 3.76 Example of Resource Management for Wideband Analog
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00159-A-02-1
In this example the fixed frequency waveform supports wideband analog with the PTT_2 line.
An application can be activated or deactivated with the relevant OFF/ON toggle softkey.
Only hardware resources that are used for an application can be selected. The other resources are set
to grey and cannot be selected.
Resources which are already in use cannot be assigned to other applications. This is indicated at the
relevant application.
When performing a new configuration, first release all resources with the RELEASE ALL RESOURCES
softkey. Then configure the Radio from the left side to the right side (starting with voice and finishing
with guard monitoring). Thus the critical applications are configured first.
The Resource Management has the following features:
The structure is the same for all applications. Only allowed hardware resources are set active for
an application.
If an application is selected with the OFF/ON toggle softkey, the relevant resources are reserved.
Only free hardware resources are provided for an application.
If hardware resources are no longer available for an application, the application cannot be
switched on. The missing resource is displayed in the status line.
3.105
6125.1651.12.02
Resource Management
Table 3.6: Functions Related to the Application (Rx, RxTx, Tx)
Rx
Link 11/Y
Wideband Digital Diphase
Wideband Analog
Voice Ciphered
Voice Plain
Function
Wideband Digital Baseband
Application
Squelch
x
---
---
---
---
---
Muting
x
---
---
---
---
x
X26.13
x
x
x
x
x
x
Rx
Guard
x
x
x
x
x
---
Rx
AF AGC
x1
---
---
---
---
---
Rx
Clipper
x1
---
---
---
---
Rx/Tx Frequency in
MHz
Rx/Tx Modulation
(AM/FM)
XD 225
f < 400
XT 100
f < 512
--XD = XT
225
f < 400
x
x
x
x
x
FM
Channel
Spacing in
kHz
8.33 1 12.5
25.0
12.5
12.5
12.5
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
Tx
Power
x
x
x
x
x
x
Tx
Tone
x
---
---
---
---
---
Tx
Tx Offset
x 1, 2
---
---
---
---
---
Rx/Tx
25.0
1
only AM
2
only with 25.kHz channel spacing
The serial interface for Async Data can be configured.
6125.1651.12.02
3.106
Resource Management
Fig. 3.77 Resource Management - Configuring the Serial Interface
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00172-A-03-1
NOTE:
Bits per character is always eight.
The radio can be controlled remotely using the GB2PP protocol via LAN or serial interface.
Before using GB2PP via the serial interface, resources have to be allocated (i.e. serial interface 2 parameters) in Resource Management.
3.107
6125.1651.12.02
Resource Management
Fig. 3.78 Resource Management - Audio Configuration
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00203-A-01-1
6125.1651.12.02
3.108
Audio Monitoring
3.6.3.6
Audio Monitoring
This documentation describes how an audio signal can be added to a voice signal.
The following signals can be added to a voice signal:
Guard signal (refer to 3.6.3.7 - I/O Mapping)
Plain marker (no function in this application)
By pressing the GUARD softkey you can enable or disable the addition of a received guard signal to
the voice signal. This is configurable for UHF or VHF band or for both. The current setting is displayed
on the softkey.
Fig. 3.79 Audio Monitoring
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00160-A-02-1
3.109
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.3.7
I/O Mapping
I/O Mapping
Some radio status information must be accessible from outside via hardware signals so that these signals can be used by external devices. Some lines at the connectors X21, X23, X25 and X26 at the rear
of the unit are reserved for this purpose. Some signals can be assigned to these lines.
By pressing the I/O MAPPING softkey on the first page of the radio maintenance menu the I/O mapping
menu is displayed.
Fig. 3.80 I/O Mapping Menu
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00162-A-02-1
By pressing the SELECT SOURCE softkey the following signals can be assigned:
NONE
STATIC
SQLM
SQLHDR
SQLM_SYNC
SQLM_HDR
SQLG
SQLG_VHF
SQLG_UHF
SYNC
6125.1651.12.02
3.110
I/O Mapping
ZEROIZE
CARR
NOGO
DPP_CONFIG
MODE_HDR
COMSEC
TRANSEC
COM_TRANSEC
After a signal has been assigned to a connector line, the polarity can be changed with the POLARITY
softkey.
3.111
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.3.8
By pressing the PROTOCOL CONFIG softkey on the second page of the radio maintenance menu the
protocol configuration menu is displayed.
Fig. 3.81 Protocol Configuration Menu
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00204-A-01-1
Compatibility
NOTE:
This parameter is not changed by Default Setting functionality, see 3.6.3.2 - Default Setting.
Parameter values specified in a GB2PP software version smaller than 02.99, which cannot be handled
by the radio software using a GB2PP version greater than 02.99, can be handled in two different ways:
Accept GB2PP only commands
The radio provides no transaction unit (TU) error status, if a parameter value is set which cannot
be handled. If the parameter is requested, the last valid value is provided.
Refuse GB2PP only commands
The radio provides a previous specified TU error status, if a parameter value is set which cannot
be handled. If the parameter is requested, the last valid value is provided.
PTT Mapping Order
By pressing the PTT MAP softkey you can define if the first active PTT no. is assigned to the application
’Voice Unciphered’ or ’Wideband Analog’.
6125.1651.12.02
3.112
PTT Timeout Configuration
3.6.3.9
By pressing the PTT CONFIG softkey on the second page of the radio maintenance menu the PTT
timeout configuration menu is displayed. Here the PTT timeout function can be switched on or off and
the timeout duration can be set in the range from 0 to 300 s. To change this value the maintenance
PIN must be entered first. Both settings are kept in the permanent store and maintained after reset.
PTT timeout refers to the available PTT hardware resources selected in resource management
(PTT_L1, PTT_1, PTT_L2, PTT_2) (see 3.6.3.4 - Option Management) as well as to the front panel PTT at the headset connector (X7).
The selected configuration is effective for all five hardware PTT lines at interface connectors X25,
X26 and X27.
The defined dependencies of the PTT functionality, such as e.g. X7 PTT effective only in local
mode and X25/X26 PTT effective only in remote mode, are not affected by the PTT timeout functionality. The configuration of Low/High activation for PTT_1 and PTT_2 also remains unaffected
by PTT timeout.
In radio modes Link 11 and HDR the PTT timeout mechanism is inactive.
Fig. 3.82 PTT Timeout Configuration Menu
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00209-A-01-1
3.113
6125.1651.12.02
PTT Timeout Off
The five PTT hardware lines are treated as before.
Continuous transmission via PTT is possible.
PTT-related functions such as TX Inhibit are still possible.
PTT Timeout On
When the PTT hardware line for the currently active radio mode is activated, a timer is started
which ensures that the radio stops transmitting once the configured timeout has elapsed. When
this PTT hardware line is retriggered, the radio returns to transmit mode and the timer is reset.
Activating another PTT hardware line, which is not configured for the currently active radio mode,
has no effect on the PTT timeout functionality.
In parallel to the PTT timeout, an active TX Inhibit ensures that the radio stops transmitting. When
TX Inhibit is then deactivated, the currently used PTT hardware line is handled as if retriggered.
Changing the mode while PTT is set has the same effect as retriggering PTT, where the timer is
started anew.
CBIT Message for PTT Timeout
The moment the timer monitoring the PTT hardware lines runs into the configured timeout, a CBIT
message is created. It is displayed in the MMI, signalled via GB2PP and recorded in the error log.
Reconfiguration while PTT is active
If the radio is reconfigured while PTT is active, the currently used PTT hardware line is handled
as if retriggered, i.e. the timer is started anew with the new values.
6125.1651.12.02
3.114
3.6.3.10
In preset configuration, presets can be defined by an expert with the relevant parameters for all waveforms. This is the base for a preset operation. The user in normal operation mode just loads the defined
preset. So he easily loads all parameters and can use all waveforms (refer to 3.6.3.10 - Preset Configuration). This documentation describes how to create or edit a preset with the relevant settings.
3.6.3.10.1 Preset Settings
By pressing the PRESET CONFIG softkey in the maintenance menu the preset configuration menu is
displayed. Here the user can add, delete or edit a preset. The parameters are protected with the Setup
PIN.
Fig. 3.83 Example of Preset Configuration
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00164-A-01-1
NOTE:
An entry in red means that default mode is not possible with the current software and hardware. This preset cannot be edited. It is only possible to delete such a preset.
3.115
6125.1651.12.02
Domain Selector
The presets are divided into two domains (1, 2). For each domain 200 presets in the range of 0 to 199
can be defined. This allows two different communication scenarios for two operational areas to be defined.
With the DOMAIN toggle softkey one of the domains can be selected. For more information refer to
3.3.3 - Preset Mode.
Add Preset
With the ADD PRESET softkey a new preset is created with default values. With the EDIT PRESET
softkey the required parameters can be set.
Delete Preset or Delete All Presets
With the DELETE PRESET or DELETES ALL PRESETS softkey the selected or all presets is (are) deleted.
Invalid Preset
If an invalid preset (red) is selected, the softkey label EDIT PRESET is greyed out and the softkey
INVALID PRESET is enabled.
After pressing the INVALID PRESET softkey the reason why it is invalid is given.
Edit Preset Parameters
The preset is divided up into a folder with general parameters and in specific folders for each waveform.
The settings described below are the same either for editing a preset or for adding a new one. In the
GENERAL folder the following parameters are predefined:
Default mode of the preset
Power
Fig. 3.84 Preset Page - General Parameters
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00165-A-03-1
6125.1651.12.02
3.116
Fixed Frequency Preset Parameters
In the FIXED FREQUENCY folder the following parameters are predefined for this waveform:
Fig. 3.85 Preset Page - Fixed Frequency Parameters
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00166-A-03-1
Table 3.7: Fixed Frequency Mode — Preset Settings
Softkey
Type
Submenu
Refer to
Frequency
Editor
/Main/Maintenance/Preset Configuration/Preset Edit
Frequency (p. 49)
Com Mode
Listbox
Communication
Modes (p. 48)
Modulation
Toggle
Modulation (p. 49)
TX Offset
Listbox
TX Offset (p. 49)
Ch Spacing
Listbox
Channel Spacing (p.
50)
Half Duplex
Toggle
Half Duplex Mode (p.
50)
3.117
6125.1651.12.02
Link 11/Y Preset Parameters
In the Link 11/Y Parameter folder the following parameters are predefined:
Fig. 3.86 Preset Page - Link 11/Y Parameters
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00189-A-01-1
By pressing the FREQUENCY softkey you can enter the Link 11/Y frequency.
6125.1651.12.02
3.118
High Data Rate Preset Parameters
In the High Data Rate Parameter folder the following parameters are predefined:
Fig. 3.87 Preset Page - High Data Rate Parameters
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00190-A-01-1
By pressing the FREQUENCY softkey you can enter the HDR frequency.
3.119
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.4
Control Unit
Control Unit
The following maintenance functions of control unit and radio are largely identical:
IBIT and CIT, see 3.6 - Maintenance
Inventory, see 3.6.2 - Configuration and Status
Address setting, see 3.6.2 - Configuration and Status
3.6.4.1
MMI Parameters
This documentation shows how to adapt the system to personal requirements. It is described, among
other things, how to modify the brightness of the keyboard and the display and how to change the date
and frequency format.
By pressing the DATE FORMAT softkey (see Fig. 3.88) in the control unit maintenance menu, different
date formats can be selected.
Fig. 3.88 Setting the Date Format
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00171-A-02-1
By pressing the FREQUENCY FORMAT softkey (listbox not shown) in the control unit maintenance
menu you can choose a preferred frequency format that is used for displaying frequencies in the central
area and in editors.
By pressing the MMI PARAMETERS softkey in the control unit maintenance menu, the control unit MMI
parameters menu is displayed.
6125.1651.12.02
3.120
Control Unit
Fig. 3.89 Setting the MMI Parameters
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00170-A-01-1
The following settings are possible:
The contrast of the display can be adjusted with the DISPLAY CONTRAST softkey.
The brightness of the display can be adjusted with the DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS softkey.
The brightness of the unit indicators can be adjusted with the INDICATOR BRIGHTNESS softkey.
The brightness of the keyboard can be adjusted with the KEYBOARD BRIGHTNESS softkey.
The time for the screen saver can be set with the SCRN SAVER softkey or can be swiched off.
Recommendation: When at low temperatures (below 10 °C) the display background illumination
is frequently switched on and off, the durability of the illumination decreases considerably. For operation at low temperatures we therefore recommend 15 minutes as the shortest time for screen
saver activation.
At temperatures around or below the freezing point the screen saver should not be used at all
(setting OFF), so that the control unit is constantly kept warm by the background illumination.
3.121
6125.1651.12.02
3.6.4.2
Control Unit
Default Settings
When the control unit is powered on for the first time the following default settings are active:
Table 3.8: Default Settings
Default address control unit
Logical 47
IP 192.168.052.047
PIN
PIN is set to 00000
Contrast
100 %
Brightness
100 %
Display timer
60 min
Display elements
100 %
Key illumination
100 %
Frequency
ICAO
Date format
YYYY/MM/DD
6125.1651.12.02
3.122
Control Unit
3.6.4.3
Test of Key Functions
The control unit IBIT also includes a test of the key functions. The maintenance menu "1310 Control
Unit IBIT Results" in addition offers the possibility to test the key functions separately. First press
softkey "Keyboard Test". Then in menu "1312 Control Unit Keyboard Test" successively press all keys
and softkeys. When keys of the numeric keypad are pressed, the number of the relevant key is briefly
displayed. Errors which may have been detected are displayed in menu 1310.
By pressing keys "MENU HOME" and "ENT" simultaneously the test can be stopped any time. If no
further key is pressed within 10 seconds, the programme automatically returns to menu 1310.
Fig. 3.90 Test of Key Functions
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00199-A-01-1
3.123
6125.1651.12.02
6125.1651.12.02
Control Unit
3.124
Malfunctions
4.
Malfunctions
4.1
Visual Inspection
CAUTION
If a connector shows any discoloration caused by heat, its mating connector is also
defective and must also be replaced.
Check the following:
1
Check the external wiring between the radio with or without the control unit and the external
equipment.
2
Check if all connectors are plugged in firmly.
3
Check the power supply cable and the RF coaxial cables at the rear for mechanical damage.
If necessary, replace cables by new ones one by one until the defective connection has been found.
Obvious damage of minor importance can be corrected at once, assuming that the appropriate equipment is available. In case of severe damage, the transceiver must be sent to the nearest repair facility.
4.1
6125.1651.12.02
6125.1651.12.02
Malfunctions
4.2
5.
Maintenance
Maintenance
NOTE:
Only qualified personal may carry out any maintenance work.
5.1
It is mandatory to readjust the oscillators (temperature-compensated crystal oscillators and ovencontrolled crystal oscillator, part of radio platform) one year after the R&S M3SR radio was first
put into operation. Only this can guarantee that the specification is met. How to do this is described in 5.1.1 - Calibration.
The backup battery (part of radio platform) needs to be replaced once every three years after installation. How to do this is described in the relevant service documentation. The date of battery
replacement must be noted on the labels (1, Fig. 5.1) provided for this purpose (use e.g. waterproof pen).
Fig. 5.1 Label: Date of Battery Installation
1
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00016-A-01-1
1 -
Label
The dust protection filter mats must be cleaned or replaced (Ident. no.: 6102.6092.00) in certain
intervals. The time interval depends on the environmental conditions in which the transceiver is
used. To remove the filter mat proceed as follows:
1 Undo the two screws (1, Fig. 5.2) fixing the cover to the front panel.
6125.1651.12.02
5.1
Fig. 5.2 Removing the Cover of the Front Panel
1
1
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00017-A-01-1
1 -
Screw (2 x)
2 Carefully remove the cover.
3 Remove the filter mat from the ventilating duct.
4 Clean the filter mat by using compressed air or water.
5 Re-insert the cleaned and dried filter mat into the ventilating duct.
6 Perform steps 1 and 2 in the reverse order.
Ruggedized Version:
The dust protection filter mats must be cleaned or replaced (Ident. no.: 6102.6092.00) in certain
intervals. The time interval depends on the environmental conditions in which the transceiver is
used. To remove the filter mat proceed as follows:
1 Undo the two screws (1, Fig. 5.3 ) fixing the cover to the front panel.
Fig. 5.3 Removing the Cover of the Front Panel, Ruggedized Version
1
2
3
1
ICN-4F-A-231000-R-D0894-00017-B-01-1
1 2 3 -
Screw (2 x)
Protective cap
Protective cap
5.2
6125.1651.12.02
2 Remove the protective caps of the connectors (2 and 3).
3 Carefully remove the cover.
4 Remove the filter mat from the ventilating duct.
5 Clean the filter mat by using compressed air or water.
6 Re-insert the cleaned and dried filter mat into the ventilating duct.
7 Perform steps a and b in the reverse order.
Otherwise the transceiver is free from scheduled maintenance.
6125.1651.12.02
5.3
Calibration
5.1.1
Calibration
We recommend to readjust the oscillators (TCXO and OCXO, part of radio platform) one year after the
transceiver was first put into operation. Only this can guarantee that the specification is met.
To calibrate the oscillators the test equipment in the test equipment list (Table 5.1) is required.
NOTE:
Equivalent test equipment may be used.
Special tools are not required.
Table 5.1: List of Test Equipment
Item
Test equipment, required data
Equipment recommended by Rohde &
Schwarz
1
Control Unit R&S GB 4000C (only remotecontrolled transceivers)
2
Signal analyzer
3
10-MHz frequency standard f
4
Transceiver operator’s documentation
6105.6006.xy
R&S FSIQ3
0.01 ppm
Ordering code
1119.5005.13
conventional workshop
model
To calibrate the oscillator proceed as follows:
1
Establish the test setup according to Fig. 5.4:
Connect the external Control Unit R&S GB 4000C to LAN connector X20 of transceiver (only
remote-controlled transceivers).
Connect signal analyzer input to connector X11 REF_OUT of transceiver.
At reference input of signal analyzer connect a 10-MHz frequency standard (accuracy f
0.01 ppm).
2
Switch on all test equipment.
3
To prevent any measuring errors, operate the transceiver at least 15 minutes (TCXO) /
60 minutes (OCXO) before starting the measurements. This start-up time also applies when
switching over the clock source from TCXO to OCXO or vice versa.
4
Via the control unit activate the transceiver’s default settings by pressing the relevant softkey. All
parameters are reset to default.
5
Via the control unit select the platform parameters REF OUT and CLOCK SRC via menu 1150
Radio Modules.
Press softkey REF OUT and select 10 MHz. The reference frequency set at connector X11
now is 10 MHz.
5.4
6125.1651.12.02
Calibration
Press softkey CLOCK SRC and select the required clock source. The selected clock source is
displayed, either OCXO or TCXO.
When selecting a different clock source, allow at least 15 minutes (TCXO) / 60 minutes
(OCXO) for the transceiver to adapt.
6
By using the signal analyzer at connector X11 REF_OUT check the deviation of the 10-MHz frequency from the reference frequency of the frequency standard.
Table 5.2: Values for TCXO/OCXO Adjustment
Transceiver with
REF OUT
CLOCK SRC
Nominal value
10 MHz
TCXO
10 MHz
TCXO
±1.5 ppm
OCXO
10 MHz
OCXO
±0.1 ppm
7
To make corrections in the platform parameters proceed as follows:
Press softkey TCXO. The editing box is accessed.
Edit the tuning value for the TCXO by using the numerical keypad of the control unit.
Range of values: 0 to 4 095
Default value: 2 047
Press softkey OCXO. The editing box is accessed.
Edit the tuning value for the OCXO by using the numerical keypad of the control unit.
Range of values: 0 to 65 535
Default value: 32 767
8
After correcting the values for the TCXO/OCXO repeat the measurement acc. to step 5.
9
Switch off the transceiver and test equipment. Disassemble the test setup.
6125.1651.12.02
5.5
Calibration
Fig. 5.4 Test Setup for Calibration
1
X20 LAN
X11 REF_OUT
3
2
ICN-4F-F-231000-R-D0894-00210-A-01-1
1 2 3 -
Remote control unit (only with remote-controlled radios)
10 MHz frequency standard f 0.01 ppm
Signal analyzer
NOTE:
The 10-MHz frequency at connector X11 may also be measured by means of a frequency
counter (accuracy 10-8).
5.6
6125.1651.12.02
Care, Cleaning
5.2
Care, Cleaning
5.2.1
Care
Such measures involve cleaning and touching up slight blemishes to the varnish of the system. The
materials indicated on the list of materials (see Table 5.3) are required:
Table 5.3: List of Materials
Item
Description
1
Soft brush
2
Duster
3
Cleaning compounds, e.g. household detergent
4
Varnish front panel: RAL 7947
Telegrey chassis: KB90 grey (RAL 7001)
6125.1651.12.02
5.7
Care, Cleaning
5.2.2
Cleaning
WARNING
Wear protective goggles to protect your eyes if you are working with compressed air.
CAUTION
Ensure that the compressed air is free of condensed water by first blowing the compressed air towards the ground.
Keep a minimum distance of 20 cm between compressed air and the system.
Do for cleaning not use solvents (thinners etc.), petroleum ether or alcohol.
Such substances will irreversibly damage the varnish coat.
1
First clean the surface of the system with compressed air.
2
Continue cleaning with a soft brush or a duster.
3
Clean heavily contaminated surfaces, especially grease stains, with a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with detergent.
5.8
6125.1651.12.02
5.3
Retouching the Paint Work
Touch up the paint work of the unit as follows:
1
Remove any loose paint particles from the area of repair.
2
Clean the areas which have to be retouched with a soft, lint-free cloth and a cleaning detergent.
3
Wait until the unit is dry again.
4
Retouch the unit carefully and afterwards ensure that the paint has dried completely.
6125.1651.12.02
5.9
5.10
6125.1651.12.02
Technical Information
A1. Technical Information
A1.1
Technical Data
See Data Sheet (A2. - Drawings)
A1.1
6125.1651.12.02
A1.2
External Interfaces
External Interfaces
See
Interface Description (A2. - Drawings)
External Interfaces (A2. - Drawings)
6125.1651.12.02
A1.2
Remote Control
A1.3
Remote Control
Detailed information is provided by the document GB2 Platform Protocol - M3SR Specific Part - Basic
Radio, available on demand from Rohde & Schwarz (order no.: 6102.4760.01SB).
A1.3
6125.1651.12.02
6125.1651.12.02
Remote Control
A1.4
Drawings
A2. Drawings
6102.4002.01 SB
6102.4019.01 SB, sh. 33, 35
Parts Lists
6102.0307.01 SA (R&S XT 4410A)
6122.8010.01 SA (R&S XT 4410A)
6102.1103.01 SA (R&S XT 4460A)
6122.1109.01 SA (R&S XD 4410A
6122.3601.01 SA (R&S XD 4460A)
6122.3801.01 SA (R&S XU 4410A)
6122.6200.01 SA (R&S XT 4410A)
Data Sheet
PD 0758.1093.32
Error List
6124.8652.82
6125.1651.12 - R.1 / R.2
Display and Control Elements
6125.1651.12 - D.1 to D.4
External Interfaces
6125.1651.12 - E.1 to E.4
Menu Structure
6125.1651.12 - M.1 to M.6
A2.1
6125.1651.12.02
6125.1651.12.02
Drawings
A2.2
Schnittstellenbeschreibung
zu:
for:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
Material-Nr.:
Material No.:
6102.4002.01
Datum:
Date:
14.03.2003
subject to change without notice due to technical improvements!
erstellt von:
issued by:
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Friedl/2GEG
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type: M3SR
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
1
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
Sprache / Language: en
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Materialnummer / material No.: 6102.4002.01 SB
Diese Unterlage ist ein Rechnerausdruck, Änderungen können nur durch Ändern des Datensatzes erfolgen.
This document is a computer printout, modifications can only be made in the data record.
Document History
Rev.
Rev. Date
01.00
02.00
Dept. / Name
Modified Pages
Short Description
21.06.2001 2GEE Friedl
all
first edition
14.12.2001 2GEG Friedl
all
New types of series 4400 radios added
03.00
all
Update; X24 RS232 added
X22: V10 now.; Revision of all pins
03.10
All
X5031 and X5032 separate antenna
sockets added
03.20
All
X5033 separate antenna socket added
04.00
All
NEW RELEASED
04.01
Page 9, 10
X6 LAN Connection corrected,
TX/RX mixed up
05.00
Page: 14-42
X22, X24, RS232 corrected to V.28
X21, X23, X25,X26 Definition of
Input and output changed
X27, X28 internal pullup changed
according to new model <90.
05.01
X32 Batt.input voltage corrected
X6 / X20 MDU / MDI-X type added;
X21 refinement of explanation
(SATURN 16kSync Mode)
X23 refinement of explanation
(Secos only)
5.01a
21.5.2005
Typing error corrected:
X2 corrected to X1 (ET44xx only)
2GEG Friedl
6.4.2005
X32 Battery connector type corrected
15.12.2005
X23.4 definition added
5.02
1.6.2006
2GE3 Friedl
NEW Released with further remarks for
SW Release 11
5.03
3.7.2006
2GE3 Korb / Friedl
X27/X28.44 200MHz0 and 200MHz1
changed to 200MHz due to the fact, that
no difference in control is realised in SW
27.7.2006
2GE3 Friedl
X23.6 Typing error in English translation
corrected
27.7.2006
2GE3 Friedl
X4 Service/Fill not fitted in all models of
radio
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
2
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
Materialnummer / Part No.:
6102.4002.01 SB
Rev.
Rev. Date
Dept. / Name
5.04
16.01.2007 2GE3 Friedl
Modified Pages
Short Description
Released
Comment at X27.7 / X27.34 / X28.7 /
X28 / 34 added.
X22.7 corrected: Transmit with HIGH
X24 signal definitions corrected
Clarification:
X26: Phantom functionality only realised
in hardware and not supported by SW
X7.E: Supply voltage added for active
MIC
X23.6+.7: explanation added
RELEASED
5.04a
8.6.2007
2GE3 Friedl
New SW configurable logic signals
added for SW Release >= 15:
e.g.
- comsec
- transec
- comsec + transec
- HighDataRate
X21.1 Logic of signal is fix => corrected
5.04b
25.6.2007
2GE3 Korb
X22.6./9 detailed specification of 16k
sync clock.
5.05
26.6.2007
released
2GE3 Friedl
Option UX4401 added (X128 / X129):
5.05a
8.10.2007
2GE3 Friedl
Definition of FM deviation added for
X25.6 and X26.6 in WB Digital Mode.
X27.9 and X27.33 / X28.9 and X28.33
VHF / UHF signalling explained in detail
with note 2 and 3
Zeroize X23.5 (EmClr) definition added
X128 IF_IN Definition added
Referencees corrected (X26.20;
X27.11-14; X27.25-30; X27.40-44;
X28.11-14; X28.25-30; X28.40-44;
Clearification added to X27.1, X28.1;
X33.5.
32V to 31V corrected as max. voltage
Explanation of User I/O during power up
added
5.06
13.11.2007 2GE3 Friedl
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
RELEASED
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
3
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
Inhalt / Contents
Allgemeine Bemerkungen / General Remarks.................................................................................................................. 4
Konfigurierbarkeit ab SW Release 11 (Juni 2006) / SW-Configuration of HW Pins with SW >= Release 11/15:......... 5
X1:
Netzanschluß (nur ET 44xx) / Mains Connection (ET 44XX only) ................................................................... 6
X4:
Service / Fill (HCCP).......................................................................................................................................... 6
X5:
Service / Fill (HBASFP) ..................................................................................................................................... 9
X6:
Ethernet-Anschluß / Ethernet Connection .......................................................................................................... 11
X7:
Anschluß Kopfsprechgarnitur / Headset Connection.......................................................................................... 12
X10:
Referenzfrequenz-Eingang / Reference Frequency Input ................................................................................... 13
X11:
Referenzfrequenz-Ausgang / Reference Frequency Output ............................................................................... 13
X20:
Ethernet-Anschluß / Ethernet Connection .......................................................................................................... 13
X21:
Verschiedenes 2 / Miscellaneous 2 ..................................................................................................................... 14
X22:
RS232-Anschluß/ RS232 Connection................................................................................................................. 16
X23:
Verschiedenes 1 / Miscellaneous 1 ..................................................................................................................... 17
X24:
RS485 / RS422 / RS232 ..................................................................................................................................... 21
X25:
NF-Schnittstelle 2 / AF Interface 2..................................................................................................................... 25
X26:
NF-Schnittstelle 1 / AF Interface 1..................................................................................................................... 30
X27:
Filter/Verstärkersteuerung 1 / Filter/Amplifier Control 1................................................................................... 37
X28:
Filter/Verstärkersteuerung 2 / Filter/Amplifier Control 2................................................................................... 41
X30:
Antenne/ RX / Antenna/RX................................................................................................................................ 45
X31:
Netzanschluß (nur ST 44xx und XT 44xx) / Mains Connection (ST 44xx and XT 44xx only) ........................ 45
X32:
Batterieanschluß / Battery Connection ............................................................................................................... 46
X33:
Externe Stromversorgung / External Power Supply ........................................................................................... 47
X128: ZF Eingang 70MHz / IF Input 70MHz for special types only (option) .............................................................. 49
X129: ZF Ausgang 70MHz / IF Output 70MHz for special types only (option)........................................................... 49
X5031: Antenne RX / Antenna RX for special types only (option) ............................................................................... 50
X5032: Antenne GRX / Antenna GRX for special types only (option) .......................................................................... 50
X5033: Antenne RX/GRX / Antenna RX/GRX for special types only (option) ............................................................. 50
Allgemeine Bemerkungen / General Remarks
∑ Signalnamen, denen das Zeichen ˜ vorangestellt ist, sind low-aktiv (z. B. ˜PTT_LINE_1).
∑ ÜSS: Überspannungsschutz (Ein-/Ausgang ist gegen Spannungsspitzen geschützt)
∑ Note 1) Phantom – PTT und Phantom-Squelch werden von der SW nicht unterstützt, sind aber in der HW realisiert.
∑
∑
∑
∑
Signal names with leading ˜ are low-active (e. g. ˜PTT_LINE_1).
OVP: Over Voltage Protection – in-/output is protected against transient overvoltage.
Note 1) Phantom – PTT and Phantom-Squelch is (realized only by hardware and) not supported by software !
Note 2) X27.9 VHF Signalling is High, if:
- PA VU220L is configured
- PA VHF output pwr is configured (max. 25W @ AM; 35W@FM)
- used frequency is between 118 and 143,975MHz in fixed frequency mode
∑ Note 3) X27.33 UHF Signalling is High, if:
- PA VD480L is configured
- PA UHF output pwr is configured (max. 35W @ AM; 50W@FM)
- used frequency is between 225 and 399,975MHz in fixed frequency mode and SECOS
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
4
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
Konfigurierbarkeit von User I/O Pins ab SW Release 11 (Juni 2006) /
SW-Configuration of User I/O Pins from SW Release 11:
Jeder mit *) gekennzeichnete Ein- und Ausgang kann auf folgendes logische Signal geroutet werden.
Die HW – Definitionen der Pins bleiben dabei erhalten !
Hinweis: Bei Konfiguration auf „High Aktiv“ ist der Status der Signale während des Bootens des Radios undefiniert (high).
Deshalb die Empfehlung nach Möglichkeit Low Aktiv“ benutzen !
- NONE = Kein Signal
- STATIC = statisches Signal (Dauer-High oder Dauer-Low)
- SQLM = Squelchsignal des Hauptempfängers
- SQLG = Squelchsignal des Guardempfängers
- ZEROIZE = Löschen von Schlüsseln ind Schlüsselgeräten (z.B. KY58)
- CARR = HF-Träger-Signalisierung
- SYNC = Sync OK Meldung bei SECOS
- NOGO = (GO) NOGO Meldung des Radios
- SQLM_SYNC = SQLM oder SYNC Meldung liegt im Radio an
Zusätzliche Logik implementiert ab SW Release >= 15:
- comsec = Anzeige Radio im SECOS COMSEC Mode
- transec = Anzeige Radio im SECOS TRANSEC Mode
- comsec + transec = Anzeige Radio im SECOS COMSEC oder TRANSEC Mode
- sqlhdr = Squelch HighDataRate
- sqlm_hdr = Squelch des Hauptempfängers oder Squelch HighDataRate
- sqlg_vhf = Squelchsignal des Guardempfängers (nur VHF)
- sqlg_uhf = Squelchsignal des Guardempfängers (nur UHF)
- dpp_config = Anzeige DPP wird umkonfiguriert
- mode_hdr = Radio im HighDataRate Mode
Jeder Ein- und Ausgang kann zu logisch Low oder High aktiv definiert werden
Each with *) marked In- or Output can be routed to the following logical signal:
The HW definition of the pin leaves unchanged !
Hint: Signals with configuration „High Activ“ are in an undefined (high) status during bootup of the radio
Therefore we recommend to use the setting „ Low Activ“!
- NONE = no Signal
- STATIC = static signal (permanent-High or permanent Low)
- SQLM = Squelch signal of Main receiver
- SQLG = Squelch signal of Guard receiver
- ZEROIZE = Erase of keys in cipher runits (e.g. KY58)
- CARR = RF-Carrier-signal
- SYNC = Sync OK status of SECOS
- NOGO = (GO) NOGO status of the radio
- SQLM_SYNC = SQLM or SYNC status of the radio
additional logic implemented with SW Release >= 15:
- comsec = Radio in SECOS COMSEC mode
- transec = Radio in SECOS TRANSEC mode
- comsec + transec = Radio in SECOS COMSEC or TRANSEC mode
- sqlhdr = Squelch HighDataRate
- sqlm_hdr = Squelch signal of Main receiver or Squelch HighDataRate
- sqlg_vhf = Squelch signal of Guard receiver (VHF only)
- sqlg_uhf = Squelch signal of Guard receiver (UHF only)
- dpp_config = DPP in configuration
- mode_hdr = Radio in HighDataRate Mode
Each in- or output can be defined to logical LOW active or logical HIGH active.
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
5
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
Eintragung in der Spalte R (Richtung) / Entry in column D (direction):
Eintragung in der Spalte A (Art) / Entry in column T (type):
Eintragung in der Spalte PT (Prüf- und Trimmplan) /
Entry in column TI (test instructions):
R
D
Signal
Name Beschreibung / Description
A
T
O = Ausgang / Output
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
B = Bidirektional / Bidirectional
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X1: Netzanschluß (nur ET 44xx) / Mains Connection (ET 44XX only)
EURO plug including earth connection.
I
AC power supply
P
Siehe Datenblatt
Nennspannung:
85...264 VAC
Strom £ 2,2 A
Leistungsaufnahme
£ 190 W
See data sheet
Nominal voltage:
85 to 264 VAC
Current £ 2.2 A
Power consumption
£ 190 W
X1
Nur bei ET 44xx.
Falls verwendet,
muß externe
Sicherung wegen
Einschaltstrom
≥ 5 A T haben
Available with
ET 44XX only.
External fuse, if
used, must be
≥ 5AT
because of
switch-on current
X4: Service / Fill (HCCP)
Achtung! Bestückung abhängig von Radio-Ausführung ! X4 not fitted in all radio models !!
7 pins, female; Pinout siehe Anhang / Pinout see attachment
KDD-Anschluß / KDD
Connector DS101
Frontplatte
Front panel
COMMON REFERENCE
P 0V
BALANCED LINE +
B
D V.11
1
X4.1
Masse
Ground
X4.2
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
WAKEUP
I
D 0 = 0 V...-0,5 V
1 = offen
0 = ext. Gerät
sendebereit
0 = 0 V to -0.5 V
1 = open
0 = ext. device clear to
send
X4.3
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X4.4
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 4 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 4 kW
BALANCED LINE -
B
D V.11
1
X4.5
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type: M3SR
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
6
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
Sprache / Language: en
Materialnummer / material No.: 6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
Nicht belegt
Not connected
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X4.6
Bemerkung
Remarks
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X4.7
KDD-Anschluß / KDD
Connector DS102
Frontplatte
Front panel
COMMON REFERENCE
P 0V
INDICATOR
I
REQUEST
I
INFORMATION
I
CLOCK
I
D 0 = 0 V...-0,5 V
1 = offen
0 = ext. Gerät
sendebereit
0 = 0 V to -0.5 V
1 = open
send
2
D 0 = 0 V...-0,5 V
1 = -5 V...-6,8 V
1 = Sendeaufforderung
an ext. Gerät
0 = 0 V to -0.5 V
1 = -5 V to –6.8 V
1 = requesting ext.
device to send
2
D 0 = +3 V...-0,5 V
1 = -5 V...-6,8 V oder
offen, Datengeschwindigkeit £ 1,6 kbps
0 = +3 V to –0.5 V
1 = -5 V to –6.8 V or
open,
data rate £ 1.6 kbps
2
D 0 = 0 V...-0,5 V oder
offen
1 = -5 V...-6,8 V
0 = 0 V to –0.5 V or
open
1 = -5 V to –6.8 V
2
X4.1
Masse
Ground
X4.2
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
X4.3
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
X4.4
Daten
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 4 kW
Data
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 4 kW
X4.5
Bittakt
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Bit clock
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X4.6
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
7
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
Nicht belegt
Not connected
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X4.7
KDD-Anschluß / KDD
Connector RS232
Frontplatte
Front panel
GND
INSERTED
I
TXD
P 0V
X4.1
Masse
Ground
D 0 = 0 V...-0,5 V
1 = offen
0 = ext. Gerät
angeschlossen
0 = 0 V to -0.5 V
1 = open
0 = ext. device
connected
X4.2
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
O D V.10
3
X4.3
Daten zum ext.
Gerät
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Data to ext.
device
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
RXD
I
D V.10
3
X4.4
Daten vom ext.
Gerät
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 4 kW
Data from ext.
device
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 4 kW
Nicht verwendet
Not used
I
D
X4.5
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X4.6
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Nicht belegt
Not connected
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
X4.7
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
8
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X5: Service / Fill (HBASFP)
6 way recessed socket ; Pinout siehe Anhang / Pinout see attachment
KDD-Anschluß / KDD
Connector DS101
Frontplatte
Front panel
COMMON REFERENCE
P 0V
BALANCED LINE +
B
D V.11
1
X5.A
Masse
Ground
X5.B
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
WAKEUP
I
D 0 = 0 V...-0,5 V
1 = offen
0 = ext. Gerät
sendebereit
0 = 0 V to -0.5 V
1 = open
send
X5.C
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X5.D
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 4 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 4 kW
BALANCED LINE -
B
D V.11
1
X5.E
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X5.F
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
KDD-Anschluß / KDD
Connector DS102
Frontplatte
Front panel
COMMON REFERENCE
P 0V
INDICATOR
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
I
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
D 0 = 0 V...-0,5 V
1 = offen
0 = ext. Gerät
sendebereit
0 = 0 V to -0.5 V
1 = open
send
Fl
Datum / Date:
2
X5.A
Masse
Ground
X5.B
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
9
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
REQUEST
I
D 0 = 0 V...-0,5 V
1 = -5 V...-6,8 V
1 = Sendeaufforderung
an ext. Gerät
0 = 0 V to -0.5 V
1 = -5 V to –6.8 V
1 = requesting ext.
device to send
2
D 0 = +3 V...-0,5 V
1 = -5 V...-6,8 V oder
offen, Datengeschwindigkeit £ 1,6 kbps
0 = +3 V to –0.5 V
1 = -5 V to –6.8 V or
open,
data rate £ 1.6 kbps
2
D 0 = 0 V...-0,5 V oder
offen
1 = -5 V...-6,8 V
0 = 0 V to –0.5 V or
open
1 = -5 V to –6.8 V
2
Signal
INFORMATION
I
CLOCK
I
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X5.C
Bemerkung
Remarks
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
X5.D
Daten
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 4 kW
Data
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 4 kW
X5.E
Bittakt
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Bit clock
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X5.F
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
KDD-Anschluß / KDD
Connector RS232
Frontplatte
Front panel
GND
INSERTED
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
I
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
P 0V
X5.A
Masse
Ground
D 0 = 0 V...-0,5 V
1 = offen
0 = ext. Gerät
angeschlossen
0 = 0 V to -0.5 V
1 = open
0 = ext. device
connected
X5.B
Uaus = -2 V
Fl
Datum / Date:
Ri = 20 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
10
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
TXD
O D V.10
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
3
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X5.C
Bemerkung
Remarks
Daten zum ext.
Gerät
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Data to ext.
device
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
RXD
I
D V.10
3
X5.D
Daten vom ext.
Gerät
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 4 kW
Data from ext.
device
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 4 kW
Nicht verwendet
Not used
I
D
X5.E
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 20 kW
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X5.F
Uaus = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
Vout = -2 V
Ri = 52 kW
X6: Ethernet-Anschluß / Ethernet Connection
Type: RJ45 – Note: X6 is a MDI-X (cross-over) connector.
PL_ETH_RX+
I
D Gemäß 10BaseT
According to 10BaseT
X6.1
MDI - X
PL_ETH_RX-
I
D Gemäß 10BaseT
X6.2
MDI - X
PL_ETH_TX+
O D Gemäß 10BaseT
X6.3
MDI - X
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X6.4
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X6.5
PL_ETH_TX-
O D Gemäß 10BaseT
X6.6
Nicht belegt
Not connected
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
X6.7
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
MDI - X
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
11
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
Nicht belegt
Not connected
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X6.8
X7: Anschluß Kopfsprechgarnitur / Headset Connection
7 way recessed socket (R&S 586.7855.00)
{mating connector: 7-way connector R&S 586.8239.00 with preformed shrinking sleeve R&S 586.8245.00}
Kopfhörer, Ausgang
Headphones, output
O A max. 0,8...1,0 V
max. 0.8 to 1.0 V
P
X7.A
Typ. max. 2,5V
Kopfhörer (-), Rückleiter nach B
Masse
Headphones (-), return line to
ground
P 0V
Mikrofon 0,5 mV
Microphone 0.5 mV
I
A 2,5 mV ±15 dB
2.5 mV ±15 dB
Mikrofon 0,5 mV (-)
Microphone 0.5 mV (-)
B
P Masse
Ground
X7.D
Mikrofon 150 mV
Microphone 150 mV
I
A 150 mV ±15 dB
+8V voltage über
150Ohm für Mikrophon
Versorgung
X7.E
Input for electret
microphone
Input for electret
MIC
X7.B
P
X7.C
150 mV ±15 dB
+8V voltage via
150Ohm for MIC supply
*PTT
I
D Pullup 1 kW nach
+3,3 V
Pullup 1 kW to +3.3 V
X7.F
Kontakt nach
Masse =
Senden, offen =
Sendepause
Contact to GND
= transmit;
open = no
transmit
GND
B
P Masse
Ground
X7.G
Zu Mikrofon
150 mV und
PTT-Taste
For microphone
150 mV and PTT
switch
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
12
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X10: Referenzfrequenz-Eingang / Reference Frequency Input
BNC (female)
F_REF_IN
I
GND
A
Uein: 0,1...2 Veff
Rein: 50 W oder 10 kW
fein: 800 kHz, 1 MHz,
2 MHz, 5 MHz,
10 MHz
Vin: 0.1 to 2 Vrms
Rin: 50 W or 10 kW
fin: 800 kHz, 1 MHz,
2 MHz, 5 MHz,
10 MHz
Rein über
Software
definierbar
Rin is software
selectable
A Masse
Ground
X11: Referenzfrequenz-Ausgang / Reference Frequency Output
BNC (female)
F_REF_OUT
O A Uaus: 1 Veff
Raus: 50 W
Faus: 800 kHz, 1 MHz,
2 MHz, 5 MHz,
10 MHz
Vout: 1 Vrms
Rout: 50 W
Fout: 800 kHz, 1 MHz,
2 MHz, 5 MHz,
10 MHz
GND
faus über
Software
definierbar
fout is software
selectable
A Masse
Ground
X20: Ethernet-Anschluß / Ethernet Connection
Type: RJ45; Note: X20 is a MDI connector.
PL_ETH_TX+
O D Gemäß 10BaseT
X20.1
MDI - II
PL_ETH_TX-
O D Gemäß 10BaseT
X20.2
MDI - II
PL_ETH_RX+
I
X20.3
MDI - II
D Gemäß 10BaseT
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X20.4
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X20.5
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
13
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
PL_ETH_RX-
I
D Gemäß 10BaseT
Signal
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X20.6
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X20.7
Nicht belegt
Not connected
X20.8
Bemerkung
Remarks
MDI - II
X21: Verschiedenes 2 / Miscellaneous 2
DB15 (HD), male
RELAY_1
RELAY_2
*)
RELAY_3
*)
RELAY_4
*)
O D Ausgang:
Open Drain mit
internem Pullup (10 kW)
nach +28 V
Umax: +31 V
0,35 A
Imax:
Output:
open drain with internal
pullup (10 kW) to +28 V
Vmax: +31 V
0,35 A
Imax:
X21.1
O D Siehe X21.1
See X21.1
X21.2
O D Siehe X21.1
See X21.1
X21.3
O D Siehe X21.1
See X21.1
X21.4
Control of ECCM
bypass relay
typ. 0,5A @25°C
LOW =
frequency
hopping
-0.3 V
Vmin:
Vmax: +5.5 V
internal pullup (10 kW)
to +5 V
USER_I/O_0
*)
Steuerung
ECCM-BypassRelais
LOW =
frequency
hopping
X21.5
output:
open drain
Imax: 24 mA
~230 W
Ri:
Input:
Schmitt trigger
0.9..1.8 V
VT-:
>0.25 V
VH:
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
14
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
USER_I/O_1
B
D Siehe X21.5
See X21.5
X21.6
Kundenspezifischer Ein-/
Ausgang
Customerspecific input /
output
B
D Siehe X21.5
See X21.5
X21.7
Ausgang
output
GND
B
P Masse
Ground
X21.8
USER_I/O_3
B
D Siehe X21.5
See X21.5
X21.9
Ausgang
output
B
D Siehe X21.5
See X21.5
X21.10
Ausgang
output
B
D Siehe X21.5
See X21.5
X21.11
Ausgang
output
TX_Clock
O D Siehe X21.5
See X21.5
-output only-
X21.12
RX_Clock
O D Siehe X21.5
See X21.5
-output only-
X21.13
*)
USER_I/O_2
*)
*)
USER_I/O_4
*)
USER_I/O_5
*)
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Signal
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
13.11.2007
Bemerkung
Remarks
Signal im
SECOS /
SATURN
16kSync Mode
Signal in SECOS
/ SATURN comm
mode 16ksync
Signal im
SECOS /
SATURN
16kSync Mode
Signal in SECOS
/ SATURN comm
mode 16ksync
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
15
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
GND
B
P Masse
Ground
X21.14
PPS
O D Siehe X21.5
See X21.5
-output only-
X21.15
Signal
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
SekundenschlagAusgang
Puls per second
X22: RS232-Anschluß/ RS232 Connection
DB9, female;
RS232_DCD
Remarks: Series 4400 HPLAT is a DCE (modem) with respect to this connector.
Unsymetrisches Signal
O D
X22.1
gemäß V.28
DCD = Data
Carrier Detect
Begrenzt auf ±12 V
durch SuppressorDiode
unbalanced signaling
according to V.28
limited to ±12 V by
diode-suppressor
RS232_RXD
O D
RS232_TXD
I
RS232_DTR
I
D
D
Siehe X22.1
See X22.1
Siehe X22.1
See X22.1
Siehe X22.1
X22.2
RXD = Receive
Data
X22.3
TXD = Transmit
Data
X22.4
DTR = Data
Terminal Ready
X22.5
Signal ground
X22.6
DSR = Data Set
Ready
See X22.1
GND
B
P Masse
Ground
RS232_DSR
O D
Siehe X22.1
See X22.1
TX_Clock =
Signal im
SECOS /
SATURN
16kSync Mode
Signal in SECOS
/ SATURN comm
mode 16ksync
Valid for SW Release >=13.
Resource Management:
Sync Data ON +
Comm Mode 16k sync:
PIN change to
RS232_TX_Clock
RS232_RTS
I
D
Siehe X22.1
X22.7
RTS = Ready To
Send
PTT / transmit
with High
X22.8
CTS = Clear To
Send
See X22.1
RS232_CTS
O D
Siehe X22.1
See X22.1r
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
16
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
RS232_RI
O D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
Siehe X22.1
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X22.9
See X22.1
Bemerkung
Remarks
RI – Ring
Indicator
RX_Clock =
Signal im
SECOS /
SATURN
16kSync Mode
Signal in SECOS
/ SATURN
comm mode
16ksync
Valid for SW Release >=13.
Resource Management:
Sync Data ON +
Comm Mode 16k sync:
PIN change to
RS232_RX_Clock
X23: Verschiedenes 1 / Miscellaneous 1
DB15 (HD), male
TOD_A
B
D symetrisches Signal
X23.1
Time of Day
Receive Data
Input A or
Transmit Data
Output A
X23.2
Time of Day
Receive Data
Input B or
Transmit Data
Output B
X23.3
Referenzspannung für
TOD-Eingang
(nur für diesen
Zweck verwendet)
Reference
voltage for TOD
input unbalanced
usage)
X23.4
Kontakt (Open
Drain) nach
GND; offen
(> 100 kW) im
ausgeschalteten
Zustand oder im
Fehlerfall
Contact (open
drain) to GND;
open (> 100 kW)
when unit is not
powered or when
unit failed
gemäß V11
balanced signalling
according to V.11
TOD_B
B
D symetrisches Signal
gemäß V11
balanced signalling
according to V.11
TOD CONFIGURATION
O D Uaus:
RI:
Vout:
RI:
NOGO
O D Ausgang: Open Drain
Umax: +31 V
0,06 A
Imax:
Ri, max: 20 W
*)
2,5 V
1,1 kW
2.5 V
1.1 kW
Output: open drain
Vmax: +31 V
0.06 A
Imax:
Ri, max: 20 W
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
17
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
˜ZEROIZE
I
D Umin:
-9 V
Umax: +12 V
Eingang: SchmittTrigger mit internem
Pullup (10 kW) nach
+5 V
0,9...1,8 V
UT-:
>0.25 V
U H:
Signal
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X23.5
I
D Umin:
-40 V
Umax: +60 V
Pullup (10 kW) nach
+5 V
0,9...1,8 V
UT-:
>0.25 V
U H:
X23.6
.
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
Schnelles Signal
(T < 2 usec)
Abschalten der
Sendeleistung
sowohl bei
Remote als auch
Local Betrieb
z.B. für Radio
Silence
Fast signal
(T < 2 usec)
Shut down of
output power in
remote & local
mode
e.g. for radio
silence
Vmin: -40 V
Vmax: +60 V
Input: Schmitt trigger
with internal pullup
(10 kW) to +5 V
0.9.. 1.8 V
VT-:
>0.25 V.
VH:
Abt. / Dpt.:
Mindestens 1
Sekunde OFFEN
= Löschen von
Daten bzw. kein
Starten der
ECCM –
Applikation
At least OPEN
for one second =
Erasure of data
respectively no
start of ECCM
application
Vmin: -9 V
Vmax: +12 V
(10 kW) to +5 V
0.9.. 1.8 V
VT-:
>0.25 V
VH:
˜INHIBIT_TX
Bemerkung
Remarks
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
18
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
˜INHIBIT_RX
I
D Siehe X23.6
See X23.6
Signal
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X23.7
Bemerkung
Remarks
Schnelles Signal
(T < 2 usec)
Einschalten von
Zusatzdämpfung
am Empfänger
z.B. für
Störausblendung
sowohl bei
Remote als auch
Local Betrieb
z.B. zur
Unterdrückung
von Radarpulsen
Fast signal
(T < 2 usec)
Switch on of
additional RF
attenuation in the
receiver for e.g.
jammer
suppression;
in remote & local
mode
e.g. for
suppression of
radar pulses
GND
Abt. / Dpt.:
B
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
P Masse
Ground
Fl
X23.8
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
19
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
˜SOK_1
B
D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +5,5 V
interner Pullup (10 kW)
nach +5 V
Ausgang: Open Drain
24 mA
Imax:
~230 W
Ri :
Eingang: SchmittTrigger
0,9...1,8 V
UT-:
>0.25 V
U H:
Signal
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X23.9
NUR bei SECOS
Steuerung SplitSite-Betrieb
(Synchronisation
i.O.)
Ausgabe von RX,
Eingabe von TX
SECOS only:
Split site control
(sync OK)
output by RX,
input by TX
X23.10
NUR bei SECOS
(Break-in)
Ausgabe von RX,
Eingabe von TX
SECOS only:
Split site control
(Break-in)
output by RX,
input by TX
X23.11
NUR bei SECOS
(Synchronisation
i.O.), RX,
SECOS only:
Split site control
(sync OK), RX,
-0.3 V
Vmin:
Vmax: +5.5 V
to +5 V
output: open drain
24 mA
Imax:
~230 W
Ri:
˜BI_1
B
˜SOK_2
O D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +5,5 V
Ausgang: Open Drain
mit internem Pullup
(10 kW) nach +5 V
24 mA
Imax:
~230 W
Ri :
-0.3 V
Vmin:
Vmax: +5.5 V
output: open drain with
internal pull-up (10 kW)
to +5 V
24 mA
Imax:
~230 W
Ri:
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
D Siehe X23.9
See X23.9
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
20
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
˜BI_2
O D Siehe X23.11
See X23.11
X23.12
NUR bei SECOS
(Break-in), RX
SECOS only:
Split site control
(Break-in), RX
˜NE_2
O D Siehe X23.11
See X23.11
X23.13
NUR bei SECOS
Steuerung SplitSite-Betrieb (Net
Entry), RX
SECOS only:
Split site control
(Net Entry), RX
GND
B
P Masse
Ground
X23.14
˜NE_1
O D Siehe X23.9
See X23.9
X23.15
NUR bei SECOS
Steuerung SplitSite-Betrieb (Net
Entry), Ausgabe
von RX, Eingabe
von TX
SECOS only:
Split site control
(Net Entry),
output by RX,
input by TX
X24: RS485 / RS422 / RS232
DB15, (HD) female Remarks. Series 4400 HPLAT is a DTE (terminal) with respect to this connector.
GND
Abt. / Dpt.:
P
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
X24.1
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
GA, Signalmasse
GA, signal
ground
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
21
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
A
T
RS485_B_A
I
D
Signal
(RS232: CTS)
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
RS422/485 Mode:
sym. Signal gemäß
V.11
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X24.2
Modem Mode:
unsym, Signal gemäß
V28
Bemerkung
Remarks
RS422/RS485:
Ba Meldeeingang
A für „Sendebereitschaft“
RS232:
CTS Clear to
send
RS422/485 mode:
balanced signaling
according to V.11
Modem mode:
according to V.28
RS422/RS485:
Ba signalling
input A for 'clear
to send'
Begrenzt auf ±12 V
RS232:
CTS Clear to
send
diode-suppressor
RS485_S_A
B
D
symetrisches Signal
gemäß V.11
Begrenzt auf ±7.5 V
X24.3
Sa (CLK),
Takteingang A
für externen
Takt, schaltbar
auf Taktausgang
Sa (CLK), clock
input A for
external clock
switchable to
clock output
X24.4
Ia (DSR),
Anzeige Eingang
A für „Datenübertragungseinrichtung
bereit“
Ia (DSR),
indication input A
for 'data set
ready'
balanced signaling
according to V.11
limited to ±7.5 V by
diode-suppressor
RS485_I_A
I
D
symetrisches Signal
gemäß V.11
Begrenzt auf ±12 V
balanced signaling
according to V.11
diode-suppresso
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
22
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
RS485_R_A
I
D RS422/485 Mode:
sym. Signal gemäß
V.11
Signal
(RS232: RxD)
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X24.5
Bemerkung
Remarks
RS422/RS485:
Ra
RS232: RxD
Dateneingang A
für Empfangsdaten
Modem Mode:
unsym, Signal gemäß
V28
RS422/485 mode:
balanced signaling
according to V.11
RS422/RS485:
Ra
RS232: RxD
data input A for
receive data
Modem mode:
according to V.28
Begrenzt auf ±12 V
diode-suppressor
RS485_C_A
O D Siehe, X.24.5
See, X.24.5
(RS232: RTS)
X24.6
RS422/RS485:
Ca
Steuerausgang A
für „Sendeaufforderung“
RS232: RTS
RS422/RS485:
Ca, control
output A for
'request to send'
RS232: RTS
RS485_T_A
O D Siehe, X.24.5
See, X.24.5
(RS232: TxD)
X24.7
RS422/RS485:
Ta
Datenausgang A
für Sendedaten
RS232: TxD
RS422/RS485:
Ta, data output A
for transmit data
RS232: TxD
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
23
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
GND
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X24.8
G, Schutzerde
verbunden mit
Gehäusemasse
G, protective
ground
connected to
chassis ground
X24.9
Strombegrenzung durch
Längswiderstand
(50 W)
Current limitation
by series resistor
(50 W)
RS485_5V
O P Uaus:
RI:
Vout:
RI:
RS485_B_B
I
D Siehe, X.24.5
See, X.24.5
X24.10
Bb (CTS),
Meldeeingang B
für „Sendebereitschaft“
Bb (CTS),
signalling input B
for 'clear to send'
RS485_S_B
B
D Siehe, X.24.3
See, X.24.3
X24.11
Sb (CLK), Takteingang B für
externen Takt,
schaltbar auf
Taktausgang
Sb (CLK), clock
input B for
external clock
switchable to
clock output
RS485_I_B
I
D Siehe, X.24.4
See, X.24.4
X24.12
Ib (DSR),
Anzeige Eingang
B für „Datenübertragungseinrichtung
bereit“
Ib (DSR),
indication input B
for 'data set
ready'
RS485_R_B
I
D Siehe, X.24.5
See, X.24.5
X24.13
Rb (RxD), Dateneingang B für
Empfangsdaten
Rb (RxD), data
input B for
receive data
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
+5 V
50 W
+5 V
50 W
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
24
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
RS485_C_B
O D Siehe, X.24.5
See, X.24.5
X24.14
Cb (RTS),
Steuerausgang B
für „Sendeaufforderung)
Cb (RTS), control
output B for
'request to send'
RS485_T_B
O
X24.15
Tb (TxD), Datenausgang B für
Sendedaten
Tb (TxD), data
output B for
transmit data
X25.1
Schmalbandeingang 2;
für LINK11 zu
benutzen!
Narrowband
input 2
to be used for
LINK11 mode!
X25.2
Galvanische
Entkopplung
500 V,
für LINK11 zu
benutzen!
Galvanic
decoupling
500 V;
to be used for
LINK11 mode!
X25.3
Schmalbandausgang 2
für LINK11 zu
benutzen!
Narrowband
output 2
to be used for
LINK11 mode!
Siehe, X.24.5
See, X.24.5
X25: NF-Schnittstelle 2 / AF Interface 2
DB26 (HD), male
AF_TX2_NB_A
I
A Pnom: -15...+10 dBm
RI: 600 W
AGC Bereich +/- 15dB,
aber max. –30dBm ...
+15dBm!
Pnom: -15 to +10 dBm
RI: 600 W
AGC range +/- 15dB,
A but max. –30dBm ...
+15dBm !
AF_TX2_NB_B
I
AF_RX2_NB_A
O A Paus: -15...+10 dBm
RI: 600 W
Pout: -15 to +10 dBm
RI: 600 W
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
25
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
R
D
AF_RX2_NB_B
O A
X25.4
Galvanische
Entkopplung
500 V,
für LINK11 zu
benutzen!
Galvanic
decoupling
500 V;
to be used for
LINK11 mode!
P
X25.5
Analog Masse
(intern verbunden mit GND)
Analog ground
(internally
connected to
GND
A Uein: 1...8 VSS
RI: 600 W
X25.6
Breitbandeingang 2;
High erzeugt
pos. FM Hub bei
WB Digital Mode
Wideband input 2
High delivers
positive FM
deviation in WB
Digital Mode
X25.7
Breitbandeingang 2
Wideband input 2
X25.8
Breitbandausgang 2
Wideband output
2
X25.9
Breitbandausgang 2
Wideband output
2
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
(corresponding to X25.3!)
AGND
AF_TX2_WB_A
I
Vin: 1 to 8 Vpp
RI: 600 W
AF_TX2_WB_B
I
A Siehe X25.6
See X25.6
AF_RX2_WB_A
O A Uaus: 1...8 VSS
RI: 600 W
Vout: 1 to 8 Vpp
RI: 600 W
AF_RX2_WB_B
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
O A Siehe X25.8
See X25.8
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Bemerkung
Remarks
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
26
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
˜PTT_LINE_2
I
D Umin: -0,3 V
Umax: +31 V
Eingang: Komparator
mit Hysterese und Pullup (10 kW) nach +5 V
UT-: ~2.5 V
UH: ~100 mV
Signal
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X25.10
Bemerkung
Remarks
Überspannungsschutz
Overvoltage
protection
Vmin: -0.3 V
Vmax:+31 V
Input: comparator with
hysteresis and pullup
(10 kW) to +5 V
VT-: ~2.5 V
VH: ~100 mV
AGC_RX2_1
O D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +31 V
Ausgang: Open Drain
mit internem Pullup
(10 kW) nach +5 V
24 mA
Imax:
~230 W
Ri :
-0.3 V
Vmin:
Vmax: +31 V
to +5 V
24 mA
Imax:
~230 W
Ri:
X25.11
AGC_RX2_2
O D Siehe X25.11
See X25.11
X25.12
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
HF-Eingangspegel
(LSB)
AGC-Bits:
00 = 0.2 uV
01 = 3.0 uV
10 = 30 uV
11 = 300 uV
(Schaltschwellen
ca. 1, 10, 100 uV)
RF input level
(LSB)
AGC-Bits:
00 = 0.2 uV
01 = 3.0 uV
10 = 30 uV
11 = 300 uV
(Swítching at
approx. 1, 10,
100 uV)
HF-Eingangspegel (MSB)
Definition siehe
X25.11
RF input level
(MSB) see
X25.11
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
27
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
SQ_MAIN_2
GND
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
B
*)
USER_DEF_2
B
*)
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X25.13
P Masse
Ground
USER_DEF_1
Typ / Type:
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
O D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +31 V
Ausgang: Open Drain
mit internem Pullup
(100 kW) nach +5 V
25 mA
Imax:
~55 W
Ri :
-0.3 V
Vmin:
Vmax: +31 V
to +5 V
25 mA
Imax:
~55 W
Ri:
*)
Abt. / Dpt.:
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Bemerkung
Remarks
Low-aktiv
(default LOW =
Empfang) oder
high-aktiv über
Software konfigurierbar,
Softwareconfigurable
active low
(default LOW =
Receive) or
active high
X25.14
X25.15
Reserviert
Reserved
D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +31 V
interner Pullup (10 kW)
nach +5 V
Ausgang: Open Drain
24 mA
Imax:
~230 W
Ri :
Eingang: SchmittTrigger
0,9...1,8 V
UT-:
>0.25 V
U H:
-0.3 V
Vmin:
Vmax: +31 V
to +5 V
output: open drain
24 mA
Imax:
~230 W
Ri:
0.9 to 1.8 V
VT-:
>0.25 V
VH:
X25.16
Ausgang
D Siehe X25.16
See X25.16
X25.17
Fl
Datum / Date:
Customer specific I/O
13.11.2007
Ausgang
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
28
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
PTT_2
I
D Umin: -0,3 V
Umax: +31 V
Imax: <30 mA transient
Eingang: Komparator
mit Hysterese und Pullup/down (10 kW) nach
+5 V
UT-: ~2.5 V
UH: ~100 mV
Signal
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X25.18
Vmin: -0.3 V
Vmax:+31 V
hysteresis and pullup/
down (10 kW) to +5 V
VT-: ~2.5 V
VH: ~100 mV
SQ_GUARD_2
O D Siehe X25.11
See X25.11
*)
X25.19
- derzeit nicht benutzt!
- not used yet -
˜CARRIER
*)
˜LINK11
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
O D Siehe X25.11
See X25.11
X25.20
O D Siehe X25.11
See X25.11
X25.21
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Bemerkung
Remarks
Low-aktiv oder
high-aktiv über
Pullup oder Pulldown über Software konfigurierbar; Fest auf
High-aktiv, wenn
LINK11 im
Device-Mapping
gewählt ist!
Software-configurable active
low or active
high,
software-configurable pullup
or pulldown;
Fixed on active
high if LINK11 is
chosen in device
mapping!
Low-aktiv
(default LOW =
Empfang) oder
high-aktiv über
active low
(default LOW =
Receive) or
active high
LOW = Träger
low = Carrier
internally
connected to
X26.20
LINK11 Anzeige
LOW, wenn
LINK11
ausgewählt ist.
LINK11
Indication: LOW
if LINK11 mode
active
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
29
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
+5V
A
T
Wertebereich
Range
O P Uaus:
RI:
Vout:
RI:
USER_DEF_3
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
+5 V
50 W
+5 V
50 W
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X25.22
Strombegrenzung durch
Längswiderstand
(50 W)
Current limitation
by series resistor
(50 W)
X25.23
Reserviert
Reserved
X25.24
Reserviert
Reserved
B
D Siehe X25.16
See X25.16
X25.25
Ausgang
B
D Siehe X25.16
See X25.16
X25.26
Ausgang
X26.1
Schmalbandeingang 1
Phantom ~PTT
Narrowband
input 1
phantom ~PTT
*)
USER_DEF_4
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
*)
X26: NF-Schnittstelle 1 / AF Interface 1
DB26 (HD), female
AF_TX1_NB_A
I
AF_TX1_NB_B
I
Note 1)
A Pnom: -15...+10 dBm
RI: 600 W
A AGC Bereich +/- 15dB,
aber max. –30dBm ...
+15dBm!
X26.2
Pnom: -15 to +10 dBm
RI: 600 W
AGC range +/- 15dB,
but max. –30dBm ...
+15dBm !
Galvanische
Entkopplung
500 V, Überspannungsschutz
nur ohne
Phantom-PTT!
Galvanic
decoupling
500 V, overvoltage protection
without phantom
PTT only!
Phantom-PTT: siehe
PTT_Line_1 X26.10!
Phantom PTT: see
PTT_Line_1 X26.10!
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
30
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
AF_RX1_NB_A
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
O A Paus: -20...+10 dBm
RI: 600 W
Note 1)
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X26.3
Schmalbandausgang 1,
Phantom
SQ_MAIN_1
oder Phantom
CARRIER über
Software
konfigurierbar
Narrowband
output 2, phantom SQ_MAIN_1
or phantom
CARRIER
softwareconfigurable
O A
X26.4
Galvanische
Entkopplung
500 V, Überspannungsschutz
nur ohne
Phantom!
Galvanic
decoupling
500 V, overvoltage protection
without phantom
only!
P
X26.5
Analog Masse
(intern verbunden mit GND)
Analog ground
(internally
connected to
GND
A Uein: 1...8 VSS
RI: 600 W
X26.6
Breitbandeingang 1;
High erzeugt
pos. FM Hub bei
WB Digital Mode
Wideband input 1
High delivers
positive FM
deviation in WB
Digital Mode
X26.7
Breitbandeingang 1
Wideband input 1
Pout: -20 to +10 dBm
RI: 600 W
AF_RX1_NB_B
Note 1)
AGND
AF_TX1_WB_A
I
Vin: 1 to 8 Vpp
RI: 600 W
AF_TX1_WB_B
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
I
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Bemerkung
Remarks
A
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
31
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
O A Uaus: 1...8 VSS
RI: 600 W
AF_RX1_WB_A
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X26.8
Breitbandausgang 1
Wideband output
1
Vout: 1 to 8 Vpp
RI: 600 W
AF_RX1_WB_B
O A
X26.9
Breitbandausgang 1
Wideband output
1
˜PTT_LINE_1
I
X26.10
Überspannungsschutz
Overvoltage
protection
D Umin: -0,3 V
Umax: +31 V
Eingang: Komparator
mit Hysterese und Pullup (10 kW) nach +5 V
UT-: ~2.5 V
UH: ~100mV
Vmin: -0.3 V
Vmax:+31 V
hysteresis and pullup
(10 kW) to +5 V
VT-: ~2.5 V
VH: ~100 mV
AGC_RX1_1
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
O D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +31 V
Ausgang: Open Drain
mit internem Pullup
(10 kW) nach +5 V
24 mA
Imax:
~230 W
Ri :
-0.3 V
Vmin:
Vmax: +31 V
to +5 V
24 mA
Imax:
~230W
Ri:
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
X26.11
13.11.2007
HF-Eingangspegel
(LSB)
AGC-Bits:
00 = 0.2 uV
01 = 3.0 uV
10 = 30 uV
11 = 300 uV
(Schaltschwellen
ca. 1, 10, 100 uV)
RF input level
(LSB)
AGC-Bits:
00 = 0.2 uV
01 = 3.0 uV
10 = 30 uV
11 = 300 uV
(Swítching at
approx. 1, 10,
100 uV)
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
32
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
AGC_RX1_2
O D Siehe X26.11
See X26.11
SQ_MAIN_1
O D
Umin:
Umax:
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X26.12
-0.3 V
+31 V
X26.13
internal pullup (100 kW) to
*)
+5 V
output:
open drain
25 mA
Imax:
50 W
Ri:
GND
P Masse
Ground
X26.14
GND
P Masse
Ground
X26.15
BB/~DP
O D Umin:
-32 V
Umax: +0,3 V
Ausgang: Open Drain
3.5 mA
Imax:
>2.5 kW
Ri :
X26.16
-32 V
Vmin:
Vmax: +0.3 V
output: open drain
3.5 mA
Imax:
>2.5 kW
Ri :
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Bemerkung
Remarks
HF-Eingangspegel (MSB)
Definition siehe
X25.11
RF input level
(MSB) see
X25.11
Low-aktiv
(default LOW =
Empfang) oder
high-aktiv über
active low
(default LOW =
Receive) or
active high
'Basisband /
Diphase', Kontakt (Open Drain)
nach GND; offen
(> 100 kW) bei
ausgeschaltetem
Gerät, steuert
Basisband- /
Diphase-Betrieb
'Base Band /
Diphase', contact
(open drain) to
GND; open
(>100 kW) when
unit is not
powered
Controls baseband / diphase
operation
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
33
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
˜DPTT
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
O D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +31 V (7V)
Ausgang: Open Drain
mit internem Pullup
(47 kW) nach +28 V
25 mA
Imax:
230 W
Ri :
DPTT: GND
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X26.17
I
D Umin: -0,3 V
Umax: +31 V
Eingang: Komparator
mit Hysterese und Pullup/down (10 kW) nach
+5 V
UT-: ~2.5 V
UH: ~100 mV
X26.18
Vmin: -0.3 V
Vmax:+31 V
Input: comparator with.
hysteresis and pullup/
down (10 kW) to +5 V
VT-: ~2.5 V
VH: ~100 mV
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
PTT verzögert,
Kontakt (Open
Drain) nach GND
Kurzschlußfest
bis 7V
Delayed PTT,
contact (open
drain) to GND
short circuit proof
up to 7V
-0.3 V
Vmin:
Vmax: +31 V (7V)
to +28 V
25 mA
Imax:
~230 W
Ri:
DPTT: GND
PTT_1
Bemerkung
Remarks
13.11.2007
Low-aktiv oder
high-aktiv über
Pullup oder Pulldown über Software konfigurierbar
Software-configurable active
low or active
high,
software-configurable pullup
or pulldown
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
34
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
SQ_GUARD_1
*)
˜CARRIER
+28V_SW
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
Low-aktiv
(default LOW =
Empfang) oder
high-aktiv über
unabhängig
davon of VHF
oder UHF
Empfang!
active low
(default LOW =
Receive) or
active high;
independent if
VHF or UHF
receive!
O D Siehe X26.13
See X26.13
X26.19
O D Siehe X26.13
See X26.13
X26.20
LOW = Träger
intern mit X25.20
verbunden.
low = Carrier
internally
connected to
X25.20
X26.21
Reserviert
Reserved
X26.22
+28 V geschaltet
maximaler
Gesamtstrom für
X26.22, X26.23;
X27.1 X27.16
X27.31 X28.1
X28.16 and
X28.31: 6 A
O P Uaus:
IImax:
Vout:
Imax:
+16...28,5 V
1A
+16 to 28.5 V
1A
+28 V switched
maximum total
current for
X26.22,
X26.23X27.1
X27.16 X27.31
X28.1 X28.16
and X28.31: 6 A
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
35
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
+28V_SW
O P Uaus:
IImax:
Vout:
Imax:
ZEROIZE
O D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +31 V
Ausgang: Tristate
GND/offen/+28 V
5 mA
Imax:
~2.5 kW
Ri :
*)
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
X26.23
+16...28,5 V
1A
+16 to 28.5 V
1A
Bemerkung
Remarks
Siehe X26.23
See X26.23
X26.24
Vmin:
-0.3 V
Vmax: +31 V
output: tristate
GND/open/+28 V
5 mA
Imax:
~2.5 kW
Ri:
PT/CT
O D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +31 V
Ausgang: Open Drain
nach +28 V
5 mA
Imax:
~1 kW
Ri :
X26.25
Plain Text /
Cipher Text
CT = open.
Vmin:
-0.3 V
Vmax: +31 V
output: open drain to
+28 V
5 mA
Imax:
~1 kW
Ri:
CGC
I
D
-0.3 V
Umin:
Umax: +5.5 V
internal pull up (10 kW)
to +5 V
X26.26
Cipher Ground
Control
Input:
Schmitt-trigger
0.9..1.8 V
UT-:
>0.25 V
U H:
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
36
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X27: Filter/Verstärkersteuerung 1 / Filter/Amplifier Control 1
DB44 (HD), female
28V_SW
+16...28,5 V
6 A (Empfang)
2 A (Senden)
min. Last: 5 W
parallel C £ 500 mF
+16 to 28.5 V
Vout:
Imax: 6 A (RX mode)
2 A (TX mode)
minimum load: 5 W
GND
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
X27.2
O D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +5,5 V
Ausgang: Open Drain
mit internem Pullup
(10 kW) nach +5 V
24 mA
Imax:
221 W
Ri :
-0.3 V
Vmin:
Vmax: +5.5 V
to +5 V
24 mA
Imax:
221 W
Ri:
2GE3
Fl
+28 V geschaltet
maximaler
Gesamtstrom für
X26.22, X26.23;
X27.1; X27.16
X27.31 X28.1
X28.16 and
X28.31: 6 A
+28 V switched
maximum total
current for
X26.22,
X26.23X27.1
X27.16 X27.31
X28.1 X28.16
and X28.31: 6 A
P Masse
Ground
˜BLK
Abt. / Dpt.:
X27.1
O P Uaus:
Imax:
Datum / Date:
X27.3
13.11.2007
Austastung
Blanking
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
37
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
˜TX_INHIBIT0
I
D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +5,5 V
Pullup (10 kW) nach
+5 V
0,9...1,8 V
U T:
0,25 V min.
U H:
Signal
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X27.4
Vmin: -0.3 V
Vmax: +5.5 V
(10 kW) to +5 V
0.9 to 1.8 V
VT:
0.25 V min.
VH:
˜CARRIER
I
D Siehe X27.4
See X27.4
X27.5
˜FM
O D Siehe X27.3
See X27.3
X27.6
˜TX_RX
O D Siehe X27.3
See X27.3
X27.7
TEST1
I
D Siehe X27.4
See X27.4
X27.8
VHF
O D Siehe X27.3
See X27.3
X27.9
100KHZ
O D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +5,5 V
interner Pullup nach
+5 V
Var.02/03: 10 kW
Var. [04: 1.5 kW
Ausgang: Open Drain
~230 W
Ri :
Imax: 24 mA (Var 02/03)
Imax: 24 mA (Var [04)
IVmin: -0.3 V
Vmax: +5.5 V
internal pullup to +5V
Var.02/03: 10 kW
Var. [04: 1.5 kW
~230 W
Ri :
Imax: 24 mA (Var 02/03)
Imax: 24 mA (Var W04)
X27.10
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
High = Receive
LOW = Transmit
See note 2)
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
38
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
1MHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.11
800KHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.12
8MHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.13
40MHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.14
GND
P Masse
Ground
X27.15
O P Siehe X27.1
See X27.1
X27.16
GND
P Masse
Ground
X27.17
˜3DB
O D Siehe X27.3
See X27.3
X27.18
˜ENABLE0
I
D Siehe X27.4
See X27.4
X27.19
˜VSWR
I
D Siehe X27.4
See X27.4
X27.20
˜PTT
O D Siehe X27.3
See X27.3
X27.21
˜TX_INHIBIT1
I
D Siehe X27.4
See X27.4
X27.22
˜CARRIER
I
D Siehe X27.4
See X27.4
X27.23
˜FM
O D Siehe X27.3
See X27.3
X27.24
25KHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.25
200KHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.26
2MHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.27
28V_SW
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Bemerkung
Remarks
Siehe X27.1
See X27.1
13.11.2007
3 dB Dämpfung
3d B attenuation
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
39
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
10MHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.28
100MHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.29
80MHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.30
28V_SW
O P Siehe X27.1
See X27.1
X27.31
GND
P Masse
Ground
X27.32
UHF
O D Siehe X27.3
See X27.3
X27.33
See note 3)
˜TX_RX
O D Siehe X27.3
See X27.3
X27.34
High = Receive
LOW = Transmit
TEST0
I
D Siehe X27.4
See X27.4
X27.35
˜ENABLE1
I
D Siehe X27.4
See X27.4
X27.36
˜VSWR
I
D Siehe X27.4
See X27.4
X27.37
˜PTT
O D Siehe X27.3
See X27.3
X27.38
GND
P Masse
Ground
X27.39
See X27.1
50KHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.40
400KHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.41
4MHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.42
20MHz
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.43
200MHZ
O D Siehe X27.10
See X27.10
X27.44
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
Siehe X27.1
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
40
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X28: Filter/Verstärkersteuerung 2 / Filter/Amplifier Control 2
DB44 (HD), female
28V_SW
GND
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
X28.2
O D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +5,5 V
Ausgang: Open Drain
mit internem Pullup
(10 kW) nach +5 V
24 mA
Imax:
221 W
Ri :
-0.3 V
Vmin:
Vmax: +5.5 V
to +5 V
24 mA
Imax:
221 W
Ri:
2GE3
Fl
+28 V geschaltet
maximaler
Gesamtstrom für
X26.22,
X26.23X27.1
X27.16 X27.31
X28.1 X28.16
and X28.31: 6 A
+28 V switched
maximum total
current for
X26.22,
X26.23X27.1
X27.16 X27.31
X28.1 X28.16
and X28.31: 6 A
P Masse
Ground
˜BLK
Abt. / Dpt.:
X28.1
O P Uaus:
+16...28,5 V
6 A (Empfang)
Imax:
2 A (Senden)
min. Last: 5 W
+16 to 28.5 V
Vout:
Imax: 6 A (RX mode)
2 A (TX mode)
minimum load: 5 W
Datum / Date:
X28.3
13.11.2007
Austastung
Blanking
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
41
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
˜TX_INHIBIT2
I
D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +5,5 V
Pullup (10 kW) nach
+5 V
1,1...2,0 V
UT+:
0,8...1,5 V
UT-:
0,3 V min.
U H:
Signal
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X28.4
Vmin: -0.3 V
Vmax: +5.5 V
(10 kW) to +5 V
1.1 to 2.0 V
VT+:
0.8 to 1.5 V
VT-:
0.3 V min.
VH:
˜CARRIER
I
D Siehe X28.4
See X28.4
X28.5
˜FM
O D Siehe X28.3
See X28.3
X28.6
˜TX_RX
O D Siehe X28.3
See X28.3
X28.7
TEST1
I
D Siehe X28.4
See X28.4
X28.8
VHF
O D Siehe X28.3
See X28.3
X28.9
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
High = Receive
LOW = Transmit
See note 2)
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
42
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
100KHZ
O D Umin:
-0,3 V
Umax: +5,5 V
interner Pullup nach
+5 V
Var.02/03: 10 kW
Var. [04: 1.5 kW
Ausgang: Open Drain
~230 W
Ri :
Imax: 24 mA (Var 02/03)
Imax: 24 mA (Var [04)
IVmin: -0.3 V
Vmax: +5.5 V
internal pullup to +5V
Var.02/03: 10 kW
Var. W04: 1.5 kW
~230 W
Ri :
Imax: 24 mA (Var 02/03)
Imax: 24 mA (Var W04)
X28.10
1MHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.11
800KHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.12
8MHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.13
40MHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.14
GND
P Masse
Ground
X28.15
O P Siehe X28.1
See X28.1
X28.16
GND
P Masse
Ground
X28.17
˜3DB
O D Siehe X28.3
See X28.3
X28.18
˜ENABLE0
I
D Siehe X28.4
See X28.4
X28.19
˜VSWR
I
D Siehe X28.4
See X28.4
X28.20
˜PTT
O D Siehe X28.3
See X28.3
X28.21
28V_SW
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
13.11.2007
Bemerkung
Remarks
3 dB Dämpfung
3d B attenuation
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
43
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
R
D
A
T
˜TX_INHIBIT3
I
D Siehe X28.4
See X28.4
X28.22
˜CARRIER
I
D Siehe X28.4
See X28.4
X28.23
˜FM
O D Siehe X28.3
See X28.3
X28.24
25KHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.25
200KHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.26
2MHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.27
10MHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.28
100MHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.29
80MHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.30
28V_SW
O P Siehe X28.1
See X28.1
X28.31
GND
P Masse
Ground
X28.32
UHF
O D Siehe X28.3
See X28.3
X28.33
See note 3)
˜TX_RX
O D Siehe X28.3
See X28.3
X28.34
High = Receive
LOW = Transmit
TEST0
I
D Siehe X28.4
See X28.4
X28.35
˜ENABLE1
I
D Siehe X28.4
See X28.4
X28.36
˜VSWR
I
D Siehe X28.4
See X28.4
X28.37
˜PTT
O D Siehe X28.3
See X28.3
X28.38
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Signal
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
13.11.2007
Bemerkung
Remarks
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
44
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
GND
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P Masse
Ground
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X28.39
50KHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.40
400KHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.41
4MHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.42
20MHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.43
200MHZ
O D Siehe X28.10
See X28.10
X28.44
X30: Antenne/ RX / Antenna/RX
ST/XT44XX: N-Type, female
ET44XX: BNC-Type, female
B
I
O
Antenna / RX
A Siehe Datenblatt
See data sheet
Empfängereingang
Senderausgang
je nach
Gerätetyp
RX input
TX output
depending on
equipment type
X31: Netzanschluß (nur ST 44xx und XT 44xx) / Mains Connection
(ST 44xx and XT 44xx only)
DB15 male, 2 high current pins, 40A type + 5 auxiliary pins
MAIN
I
+28...+29 VDC
I £ 25 A
+28 to +29 VDC
I £ 25 A
X31.A1
Von ext. AC/DCVersorgung
from external
AC/DC supply
GND
I
0V
X31.A2
Masse
Ground
PFAIL
I
Pullup 47 kW an
+28V_DC
Pullup 47 kW at
+28V_DC
X31.1
Spannung ok:
<1V
Spannungsausfall: > 2 V oder
offen
Power ok: < 1 V
power fail: > 2 V
or open
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
45
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
R
D
PTEMP
I
Pullup 10 kW an
+28V_DC
Pullup 10 kW at
+28V_DC
X31.2
Temperatur ok: >
3 V oder offen
Übertemperatur:
<1V
Temperature ok:
> 3 V or open
overtemperature:
<1V
PRET
I
100 W nach GND
100 W to GND
X31.3
Masse zu X31.1
und X31.2
Ground to X31.1
and X31.2
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
SPARE
X31.4
SPARE
X31.5
Bemerkung
Remarks
X32: Batterieanschluß / Battery Connection
DB15 male, 3 high current pins, 40A type
(Mating connector: 3-way-female multipoint connector R&S 0070.0800.00
High current socket contacts R&S 0531.9233.00; shielded case R&S 0586.9564.00):
I
GND
P
0V
SPARE
I
BATTERY
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
P
+19...+31 VDC £ 25 A
+19 to +31 VDC £ 25 A
Fl
Datum / Date:
X32.A1
Masse
Ground
X32.A2
Nicht verwendet
Not used
X32.A3
Von ext. DCQuelle, Rückleistungsschutz:
bis –32 VDC
Transientenschutz: bis
+35 VDC
Schutz gegen
Impulsspitzen
max. ± 600 V
10 ms
from external DC
source, reverse
protection: down
to – 32 VDC
transient
protection:
up to + 35 VDC
spike protection
max. ± 600 V
10 ms
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
46
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X33: Externe Stromversorgung / External Power Supply
DB9 female
28V_EXT
O P +17...+31 V von BAT
oder +27...+29 V von
MAIN, (die jeweils
höhere Spannung)
£ 1 A; PTC-abgesichert
für 28V_EXT gesamt
X33.1
PTC-Sicherung,
ungeschaltet
PTC-fused,
unswitched
+17 to +31 V from BAT
or +27 to +29 V from
MAIN whichever is
greater
£ 1 A; PTC-fused
for 28V_EXT in total
GND
I
P 0V
X33.2
Masse
Ground
ON
I
D Offen / 0 V; < 10 mA
Pullup 10 kW to £ +35 V
Open / 0 V; < 10 mA
Pullup 10 kW to £ +35 V
X33.3
Stromversorgung
ein/aus
ein £ 3 VDC
> 5 mA
aus ≥ 8 VDC
< 1,5 mA oder
offen
Power supply
on/off
on £ 3 VDC
> 5 mA
off ≥ 8 VDC
< 1.5 mA or open
GND
I
P 0V
X33.4
Masse
Ground
28V_EXT_SW
O P +16...+28,5 VDC
I £ 6 A / max. 10 s
I £ 2 A / anhaltend
für 28V_EXT_SW
gesamt
min. Last: 5 W
X33.5
Für ext. Versorgung, elektronische Strombegrenzung (verzögerte
Rückregelung),
geschaltet
For external
supply, electronically currentlimited (delayed
foldback),
switched
+16 to +28.5 VDC
I £ 6 A / max. 10 sec
I £ 2 A / continuous
28V_EXT_SW in total
min. load 5 W
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
47
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
28V_EXT
O P Siehe X33.1
See X33.1
X33.6
PTC-Sicherung,
ungeschaltet
PTC-fused,
unswitched
OFF
I
X33.7
Stromversorgung
aus
ein ≥ 10 VDC
< 1 mA oder
offen
aus £ 3 VDC
> 5 mA;
Prioritätssignal!
Power Supply off
on ≥ 10 VDC
< 1 mA or open
off £ 3 VDC
> 5 mA;
Priority signal!
28V_EXT_SW
O P Siehe X33.5
See X33.5
X33.8
Rückregelung),
geschaltet
For external
foldback),
switched
28V_EXT_SW
O P Siehe X33.5
See X33.5
X33.9
Rückregelung),
geschaltet
For external
foldback),
switched
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
D Offen / 0 V; < 10 mA
Pullup 10 kW an
£ +35 V
Open / 0 V; < 10 mA
Pullup 10 kW at £ +35 V
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
48
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
X128: ZF Eingang 70MHz / IF Input 70MHz for special types only (option)
BNC (female)
IF_IN
I
A
Max. +25dBm ohne
Zerstörung
Rein: 50 W
70MHz
fein:
nominal (HDR Betrieb):
-10dBm bei Senden;
<-80dBm bei Empfang
Details siehe
Datenblatt Option
UX4401-U
For details
please refer to
datasheet of
option UX4401-U
Max. +25dBm without
damage
50 W
Rin:
nominal in HDR
operation
-10dBm in TX mode
<-80dBm in RX mode
GND
A Masse
Ground
X129: ZF Ausgang 70MHz / IF Output 70MHz for special types only (option)
BNC (female)
IF_OUT
O A
Max. +25dBm ohne
Zerstörung
Rein: 50 W
70MHz
fein:
nominal: -20dBm
Details siehe
Datenblatt Option
UX4401-U
For details
please refer to
datasheet of
option UX4401-U
Max. +25dBm without
damage
50 W
Rin:
nominal -20dBm
GND
Abt. / Dpt.:
A Masse
Ground
2GE3
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
Fl
Datum / Date:
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
49
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
R
D
Signal
X5031:
A
T
A = Analog
P = Prüfwert
P = Test value
Wertebereich
Range
I = Eingang / Input
D = Digital
T = Trimmwert
T = Trimming value
PT Bild Nr.
TI Fig. No.
P = Power
D = Designwert
E = Einstellwert
D = Design value
E = Setting value
Anschlußpunkt
Contact
Bemerkung
Remarks
Antenne RX / Antenna RX for special types only (option)
Separate antenna input for main receiver; BNC-Type, female
Antenna / RX
X5032:
I
A Siehe Datenblatt
See data sheet
Empfängereingang
je nach
Gerätetyp
(Option)
RX input
depending on
equipment type
(option)
Antenne GRX / Antenna GRX for special types only (option)
Separate antenna input for guard receiver; BNC-Type, female
Antenna / GRX
X5033:
I
A Siehe Datenblatt
See data sheet
Wachempfängereingang
je nach
Gerätetyp
(Option)
GRX input
depending on
equipment type
(option)
Antenne RX/GRX / Antenna RX/GRX for special types only (option)
Separate antenna input for main receiver; BNC-Type, female
Antenna RX/GRX
Abt. / Dpt.:
2GE3
I
Name:
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Typ / Type:
A Siehe Datenblatt
See data sheet
Fl
Datum / Date:
Empfänger
/Wachempfänger
-eingang
je nach
Gerätetyp
(Option)
RX/GRX input
depending on
equipment type
(option)
13.11.2007
Ä.I. / C.I.:
05.06
Benennung:
M3SR ANLAGEN-DOKU
Bl. / Sh.
50
Designation:
M3SR SYSTEM DOCU
von / of
50
M3SR
6102.4002.01 SB
el.Kennz
Part
Benennung / Hinweise
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Bilaga
1 till TOBestellbezeichnung
AF SAMBAND 100enthalten
017307
Hersteller
in
Manufacturer
Designation
contained in
a
_
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
ACHTUNG EGB /ATTENTION ESD
*VARIANTENERKLAERUNG
*EXPLANATION OF MODELS
VAR03=GRUNDAUSFUEHRUNG
MOD03=BASIC MODEL
VAR05=VAR03 MIT GI4403/VAR02
MOD05=VAR03 WITH GI4403/VAR02
VAR06=VAR03 MIT DS4401A, DFS
MOD06=MOD03 WITH DS4401A,
DFS
VAR07=VAR03 MIT GI4403 VAR03
SEP. RX/GRX ANTENNA; ACHTUNG:
ANLAGE OHNE WACHEMPFÄNGER
MOD07=MOD03 WITH GI4403
VAR03 SEP. RX/GRX ANTENNA;
ATTENTION: SYSTEM WITHOUT
GUARDRECEIVER
VAR13=VAR03 MIT LINK11
MOD13=MOD03 WITH LINK11
VAR22=VAR03 MIT FD4430
MOD22=MOD03 WITH FD4430
VAR31=VAR03 MIT
WACHEMPFAENGER
MOD31=MOD03 WITH GUARD
RECEIVER
VAR03
VAR38=VAR31 MIT GI4403 VAR 04
MOD04
VAR42=VAR31 MIT FD4430
MOD42=MOD31 WITH FD4430
MOD04
VAR60=VAR03 UND VT4403
ZIRKULATOR VORBEREITET
MOD60=MOD03 AND VT4403
CIRCULATOR UPGRADEABLE
VAR61=VAR41UND ZIRKULATOR
VORBEREITET
MOD61=MOD41 AND CIRCULATOR
UPGRADEABLE
VAR63=VAR13 UND VT4403
ZIRKULATOR VORBEREITET
MOD63=MOD13 AND VT4403
CIRCULATOR UPGRADEABLE
VAR90=ATC961
MOD90=ATC961
VAR91=VAR03, VT4403 NICHT
FD4430-FAEHIG
MOD91=MOD03, VT4403 NOT
COMPATIBLE TO FD4430
FD4430-FAEHIG
FD4430-FAEHIG
FD4430-FAEHIG
Benennung/Designation
XT4410A V/UHF-S/E-ANLAGE
XT4410A V/UHF TRANSCEIVER
XT4410A
Datum/
Date
2008-03-05
Abt. /
Dept.
2GE8
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
27.00
Blatt/Sheet
1 of 4
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
KN
6102.0307.01 SA
Bilaga
017307
Hersteller
in
el.Kennz
Part
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
A1
GG ET4400G V/UHFWACHEMPFÄNGER
ET4400G V/UHF GUA.RECEIV.
VAR 31 37 38 41 42 48 61 90 93 95
6102.8508.02
6102.0307.01
A4
GG GF4400T V/UHF SYNTHESIZER
GF4400T V/UHF SYNTHESIZER
VAR 03 05 06 07 13 22 31 37 38 41
42 48 60 61 63 90 91 93 94 95
6102.6505.03
6102.0307.01
A5
GG ET4400 V/UHF-EMPFÄNGER
ET4400 V/UHF RECEIVER
VAR 03 05 06 07 13 22 31 37 38 41
42 48 61 90 91 93 94 95
6102.7001.02
6102.0307.01
A5
VAR 60 63
6102.7018.02
6102.0307.01
A7
GT FD4430 UHF FILTER
6103.2003.02
Manufacturer
Designation
contained in
a
BPS
NACH R&S-ZEICHNUNG
6103.2003.02 AEI05.00
6102.0307.01
_
FD4430 UHF FILTER
VAR 22 42
A20
GG KR4400 RADIO BASIS
KR4400 RADIO BASIS
VAR 03 05 06 07 13 22 31 37 38 41
42 48 61
6102.5009.04
6102.0307.01
A20
KR4400 RADIO BASIS
VAR 90
6102.5009.90
6102.0307.01
A20
KR4400 RADIO BASIS
VAR 91 93 94 95
6102.5009.03
6102.0307.01
A30
GG VT4403 SENDEREINHEIT
VT4403 TRANSMITTER UNIT
VAR 03 05 06 07 13 22 31 37 38 41
42 48
6102.7501.02
6102.0307.01
A30
VT4403 TRANSMITTER UNI
VAR 60 61 63
6102.7501.06
6102.0307.01
A30
VAR 90
6102.7501.90
6102.0307.01
A30
VAR 91 93 94 95
6102.7501.91
6102.0307.01
A40
GG GB4000C LOKALE
BEDIENEINHEIT
GB4000C LOCAL CONTROL PANEL
VAR 03 05 06 07 13 22 31 37 38 41
42 48 61 91 93 94 95
6105.6006.02
6102.0307.01
A40
GG GB4000C BEDIENEINHEIT
GB4000C CONTROL UNIT
VAR 90
6105.6006.90
6102.0307.01
A50
GG GH4450
SCHNITTSTELLENKARTE
GH4450 INTERFACE MODULE
VAR 03 05 06 07 13 22 31 37 38 41
42 48 60 61 63 91 93 94 95
6103.3500.02
6102.0307.01
XT4410A
Datum/
Date
2008-03-05
Abt. /
Dept.
2GE8
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
27.00
Blatt/Sheet
2 of 4
Name /
Name
KN
6102.0307.01 SA
Bilaga
017307
Hersteller
in
el.Kennz
Part
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
A50
GG GH4400 TX-ADAPTER
GH4400 TX ADAPTER
VAR 90
6103.5502.02
6102.0307.01
A53
GS GI4403 ANT.STECKER,
INTERFACE
GI4403 ANT.CONN., INTERFACE
VAR 05
6103.4758.02
6102.0307.01
A100
GH DS4400A SOFTWARE
DS4400A SOFTWARE
VAR 03 05 07 22 31 37 38 42 91 95
6102.2000.03
6102.0307.01
A100
GH DS4401A SOFTWARE
DS4401A SOFTWARE
VAR 06
6102.2500.03
6102.0307.01
A100
GH DS4400A SOFTWARE
DS4400A SOFTWARE
VAR 13 41 48 61 93 94
6102.2000.13
6102.0307.01
A100
GH DS4400A SOFTWARE
DS4400A SOFTWARE
VAR 90
6102.2000.90
6102.0307.01
A503
INTERFACE
VAR 07 37
6103.4758.03
6102.0307.01
E1
ZE TEILESATZ XT4410A
ASSEMBLY KIT XT4410A
VAR 03 06
6102.0320.03
6102.0307.01
E1
VAR 05
6102.0320.05
6102.0307.01
E1
VAR 13 60 63
6102.0320.13
6102.0307.01
E1
VAR 22
6102.0320.22
6102.0307.01
E1
VAR 31
6102.0320.31
6102.0307.01
E1
VAR 37
6102.0320.37
6102.0307.01
E1
VAR 41 61
6102.0320.41
6102.0307.01
E1
VAR 42
6102.0320.42
6102.0307.01
E1
VAR 90
6102.0320.90
6102.0307.01
E1
VAR 91
6102.0320.91
6102.0307.01
Manufacturer
Designation
contained in
_
a
XT4410A
Datum/
Date
2008-03-05
Abt. /
Dept.
2GE8
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
27.00
Blatt/Sheet
3 of 4
Name /
Name
KN
6102.0307.01 SA
Bilaga
017307
Hersteller
in
el.Kennz
Part
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
E1
VAR 93
6102.0320.93
6102.0307.01
E1
VAR 94
6102.0320.94
6102.0307.01
E1
VAR 95
6102.0320.95
6102.0307.01
Manufacturer
Designation
contained in
_
a
XT4410A
Datum/
Date
2008-03-05
Abt. /
Dept.
2GE8
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
27.00
Blatt/Sheet
4 of 4
Name /
Name
KN
6102.0307.01 SA
el.Kennz
Part
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Bilaga
017307
Hersteller
in
Manufacturer
Designation
contained in
a
_
UND VT4403 ZIRKULATOR
VORBEREITET
MOD60=BASIC MODEL AND
VT4403 CIRCULATOR
UPGRADEABLE
VAR63=GRUNDAUSFUEHRUNG MIT
LINK11 UND VT4403 ZIRKULATOR
VORBEREITET
MOD63=BASIC MODEL WITH
LINK11 AND VT4403 CIRCULATOR
UPGRADEABLE
A4
VAR 60 63
6102.6505.03
6122.8010.01
A5
GN ET4400 V/UHF-EMPFÄNGER
6102.7018.02
6122.8010.01
A20
KR4400 RADIO BASIS
6102.5009.05
6122.8010.01
A30
VT4403 TRANSMITTER UNI
VAR 60 63
6102.7501.06
6122.8010.01
A40
GG GB4000C LOKALE
BEDIENEINHEIT
GB4000C LOCAL CONTROL PANEL
VAR 60 63
6105.6006.05
6122.8010.01
A50
GG GH4450
SCHNITTSTELLENKARTE
6103.3500.02
6122.8010.01
A100
HS DS4400A SWP REL 16.00
DS4400A SWP REL 16.00
VAR 60
6102.2051.12
6122.8010.01
A100
HS DS4400A SWP REL 16.00
DS4400A SWP REL 16.00
VAR 63
6102.2068.13
6122.8010.01
E1
ZB ZUBEHOER XT4410A
ACCESSORY XT4410A
VAR 60
6122.4166.60
6122.8010.01
E1
VAR 60 63
6102.0320.13
6122.8010.01
E1
ZB ZUBEHOER XT4410A
ACCESSORY XT4410A
VAR 63
6122.4166.63
6122.8010.01
XT4410A
Datum/
Date
2008-08-07
Abt. /
Dept.
2GE8
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
02.00
Blatt/Sheet
1 of 1
Name /
Name
KN
6122.8010.01 SA
el.Kennz
Part
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Bilaga
017307
Hersteller
in
Manufacturer
Designation
contained in
a
_
VAR02=VAR03 OHNE OCXO
MOD02=MOD03 WITHOUT OCXO
MOD03=BASIC MODEL
MOD04
VAR31=VAR03 MIT
WACHEMPFAENGER
RECEIVER
MOD34=VAR03 WITH GI4403 VAR02
VAR36=VAR03 MIT
WACHEMPFAENGER UND GI4403
VAR03 COM TRX ANT
RECEIVER AND GI4403 VAR03 COM
TRX ANT
VAR38=VAR03 MIT
WACHEMPFAENGER UND GI4403
VAR04
RECEIVER AND GI4403 VAR04
VAR91=VAR13, VT4403 nicht
FD4430-FAEHIG
VAR93=VAR31, GI4403, VT4403 nicht
FD4430-FAEHIG
MOD93=MOD31, GI4403, VT4403
NOT COMPATIBLE TO FD4430
VAR94=VAR03, GI4403, VT4403 nicht
FD4430-FAEHIG
MOD94=MOD03, GI4403, VT4403
NOT COMPATIBLE TO FD4430
A1
VAR 31 36 38 41 93
6102.8508.02
6102.1103.01
A4
VAR 02 03 08 13 31 34 36 38 41
6102.6505.03
6102.1103.01
A4
VAR 91 93 94
6102.6505.03
6102.1103.01
A5
6102.7001.02
6102.1103.01
A20
KR4400 RADIO BASIS
VAR 02
6102.5009.02
6102.1103.01
A20
KR4400 RADIO BASIS
VAR 03 08 13 31 34 36 38
6102.5009.04
6102.1103.01
A20
6102.5009.03
6102.1103.01
XT4460A
Datum/
Date
2007-07-26
Abt. /
Dept.
2GE8
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
1 of 3
Name /
Name
KN
6102.1103.01 SA
el.Kennz
Part
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Bilaga
017307
Hersteller
in
Manufacturer
Designation
contained in
a
_
KR4400 RADIO BASIS
VAR 91 93 94
A30
VAR 02 03 08 13 31 34 36 38 41
6102.7501.02
6102.1103.01
A30
VAR 91 93 94
6102.7501.91
6102.1103.01
A50
GG GH4450
SCHNITTSTELLENKARTE
6103.3500.02
6102.1103.01
A100
GH DS4400A SOFTWARE
DS4400A SOFTWARE
VAR 02 03 08 31 34 36 38 93 94
6102.2000.03
6102.1103.01
A100
GH DS4400A SOFTWARE
DS4400A SOFTWARE
VAR 13 41 91
6102.2000.13
6102.1103.01
A503
INTERFACE
VAR 08 38 93
6103.4758.04
6102.1103.01
A503
INTERFACE
VAR 34 94
6103.4758.02
6102.1103.01
E1
VAR 02
6102.1126.02
6102.1103.01
E1
VAR 03
6102.1126.03
6102.1103.01
E1
VAR 08
6102.1126.08
6102.1103.01
E1
VAR 13
6102.1126.13
6102.1103.01
E1
VAR 31
6102.1126.31
6102.1103.01
E1
VAR 34
6102.1126.34
6102.1103.01
E1
VAR 38
6102.1126.38
6102.1103.01
E1
VAR 41
6102.1126.41
6102.1103.01
E1
VAR 91
6102.1126.91
6102.1103.01
E1
6102.1126.93
6102.1103.01
XT4460A
Datum/
Date
2007-07-26
Abt. /
Dept.
2GE8
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
2 of 3
Name /
Name
KN
6102.1103.01 SA
el.Kennz
Part
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Bilaga
017307
Hersteller
in
Manufacturer
Designation
contained in
a
VAR 93
_
VAR 94
6102.1126.94
6102.1103.01
E1
XT4460A
Datum/
Date
2007-07-26
Abt. /
Dept.
2GE8
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
3 of 3
Name /
Name
KN
6102.1103.01 SA
el.Kennz
Part
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Bilaga 1 till TO
AF SAMBAND 100
017307
Bestellbezeichnung
enthalten in
Hersteller
Manufacturer
Designation
contained in
a
_
VAR03=GRUNDAUSFUHRUNG
MOD03=BASIC MODEL
VAR05=VAR03 MIT GI4403/VAR02
MOD05=MOD03 WITH GI4403/MOD02
MOD13=MOD03 MIT LINK11
MOD15=MOD13 WITH GI4403 MOD02
VAR31=VAR03 MIT
WACHEMPFAENGER
RECEIVER
VAR41=VAR03 MIT LINK 11 UND
WACHEMPFAENGER
MOD41=MOD03 WITH LINK11 AND
GUARD RECEIVER
FD4430-FAHIG
FD4430-FAHIG
FD4430-FAHIG
A1
VAR 31 41
6102.8508.02
6122.1109.01
A4
VAR 03 05 13 15 31 41
6102.6505.03
6122.1109.01
A4
VAR 91 92 93
6102.6505.03
6122.1109.01
A5
6102.7001.02
6122.1109.01
A20
KR4400 RADIO BASIS
VAR 03 05 13 15 31 41
6102.5009.04
6122.1109.01
A20
KR4400 RADIO BASIS
VAR 91 92 93
6102.5009.03
6122.1109.01
A30
VAR 03 05 13 15 31 41
6102.7501.02
6122.1109.01
A30
VAR 91 92 93
6102.7501.91
6122.1109.01
A40
GG GB4000C BEDIENEINHEIT
GB4000C CONTROL PANEL
6105.6006.02
6122.1109.01
A50
GG GH4450
SCHNITTSTELLENKARTE
6103.3500.02
6122.1109.01
XD4410A UHF-S/E-ANLAGE
XD4410A UHF TRANSCEIVER
XD4410A
Datum/
Date
2006-11-15
Abt. /
Dept.
2GEM
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
10.00
Blatt/Sheet
1 of 2
Name /
Name
SN
6122.1109.01 SA
el.Kennz
Part
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Bilaga 1 till TO
AF SAMBAND 100
017307
Bestellbezeichnung
enthalten in
Hersteller
Manufacturer
Designation
contained in
a
_
A53
INTERFACE
VAR 05 15 93
6103.4758.02
6122.1109.01
A100
GH DS4400A SOFTWARE
DS4400A SOFTWARE
VAR 03 05 31 91
6102.2000.23
6122.1109.01
A100
GH DS4400A SOFTWARE
DS4400A SOFTWARE
VAR 13 15 41 92 93
6102.2000.33
6122.1109.01
E1
ZE TEILESATZ XD4410A
ASSEMBLY KIT XD4410A
VAR 03
6122.1121.03
6122.1109.01
E1
VAR 05 15
6122.1121.15
6122.1109.01
E1
VAR 13
6122.1121.13
6122.1109.01
E1
VAR 31
6122.1121.31
6122.1109.01
E1
VAR 91
6122.1121.91
6122.1109.01
E1
VAR 92
6122.1121.92
6122.1109.01
E1
VAR 93
6122.1121.93
6122.1109.01
XD4410A UHF-S/E-ANLAGE
XD4410A UHF TRANSCEIVER
XD4410A
Datum/
Date
2006-11-15
Abt. /
Dept.
2GEM
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
10.00
Blatt/Sheet
2 of 2
Name /
Name
SN
6122.1109.01 SA
Data sheet
Digital Reprogrammable Software Radios ¸M3SR
Your key to interoperability
◆ High operational flexibility while on
mission
◆ Interoperability with existing radios
according to international standards
◆ Easy system integration
◆ Low life cycle costs
◆ Software download of new
waveforms
◆ High growth potential through P3I
(preplanned product improvement)
◆ Embedded hopping filter optionally
available
Radio Basis ¸KR4400
The various models are set up on the
hardware and software of the Radio
Basis ¸KR4400, which forms the central and common part of all ¸M3SR
radios. The radio basis is independent of
the RF-specific modules. Additional radiospecific hardware and software modules
define the performance features of the
radio.
The ¸M3SR (multiband, multimode
and multirole surface radio) represents an
innovative and versatile generation of
software radios for use in the navy, civil
and military air traffic control, air defence
and stationary applications.
In addition to the ¸M3TR (multiband,
multimode and multirole tactical radio)
and ¸M3AR (multiband, multimode
and multirole airborne radio), the ¸
M3SR is the third element of a new radio
equipment generation. All three feature
functionality that can be varied by means
of software.
municate with neighbouring troops, the
radio is switched to the waveform or
communication protocol used there. This
switchover can be carried out online even
during a mission.
The operational functions and the available waveforms are determined by the
loaded application software. Additional
functions can be implemented, as
required, by downloading the appropriate
software and/or using plug-in hardware
modules.
Modular design
For the commercial user, the basic units
come standard with the waveform for air
traffic control (ATC) in line with
EN300676. The ¸M3SR can be used
both in normal ATC operation and as an
emergency backup radio.
The ¸M3SR is interoperable with
many types of existing radio equipment
and standards. For military customers,
this means seamless communication
with their own and allied troops. To com-
2
The ¸M3SR features highly modular
hardware and software architecture. All
¸M3SR units are based on the uniform Radio Basis ¸KR4400. The versatile P3I upgrade concept of the basic
version helps to avoid unnecessarily high
initial investment costs.
The ¸M3SR is available as a receiver,
transmitter or transceiver, according to
the customer's requirements.
The ¸KR4400 consists of the
mechanical frame, the radio platform and
a front panel with audio interface, loudspeaker and status displays. The platform
is the control center of the radio. The
embedded realtime operating system
controls and monitors all functions in the
radio. A control panel (¸GB4000C)
can be integrated for local control of the
radios.
The main tasks of the radio basis include:
◆ Monitoring and control of the
complete radio unit
◆ Mechanical and electrical accommodation of modules and control panel
◆ Digital voice and data processing
◆ Internal routing of information data
to the interfaces
◆ Standard interfaces to peripherals
◆ Audio interface, loading of encryption
keys and display of status information
An oven-controlled crystal oscillator
(OCXO) is integrated as standard to meet
the stringent requirements regarding
frequency and time stability.
For the configuration of the various radio
models, the radio basis is equipped with
slots for the radio modules, and a
mechanical fixture on the side to accommodate the transmitter module.
Key features of the modules
The modules have the following
outstanding features:
◆ Independent use of all modules
(no alignment or manual adjustment
when modules are replaced)
◆ Central download of software and
firmware (no need to open the
radio unit)
◆ Data exchange via radio module bus
◆ Type label with bar code identification down to PCB level (fast automated detection and identification)
◆ Radio inventory report providing
complete overview of radio contents
◆ All modules with electromagnetic
shielding (maximum EMC/EMI
immunity)
◆ All settings made via software
(reduced maintenance)
◆ Fast and easy replacement of
modules (short MTTR)
VHF/UHF Receiver Module
¸ET4400
The Main Receiver Module ¸ET4400
can be universally used for all operational
modes in the VHF/UHF range from
100 MHz to 512 MHz. The use of programmable VLSI components makes the
module extremely compact, occupying
only one slot. The flexible digital demodulator allows the processing of complex
digital waveforms.
Electronic Protective Measures (EPM)
Processor Module ¸GP4400
The powerful EPM Processor Module
¸GP4400 handles data processing
for special waveforms. It occupies one
radio module slot and can host EPM
waveforms such as SATURN, SECOS or
HAVE QUICK I/II on its memory devices.
Its functionality is determined by the
loaded software.
VHF/UHF Guard Receiver
¸ET4400G
The ¸ET4400G simultaneously monitors the emergency frequencies in the
VHF (121.5 MHz) and UHF (243 MHz)
ranges and can be installed in any
¸M3SR model, irrespective of the
other modules. The AF of the guard
receiver can either be routed to one of the
audio interfaces or mixed with the AF of
the main receiver. The software for using
a guard receiver is supplied with the
basic unit.
Power modules
Modules for radio module slots
VHF/UHF Synthesizer Module
¸GF4400T
The synthesizer module is the core of the
high-frequency structure of the radio
unit. It covers the frequency range from
100 MHz to 512 MHz, generates the RF
signal for driving the transmitter and supplies the local oscillator (LO) signal for the
receiver module. Direct digital synthesis
(DDS) technology ensures fine frequency
tuning with high accuracy and high
speed. The extremely low-noise signal
generation allows the radio to be used at
sites with stringent requirements regarding large-signal immunity (collocation).
VHF/UHF Transmitter Module
¸VT4403
The ¸VT4403 is a universal transmitter module for all operational modes in
the frequency range 100 MHz to 512 MHz
and is mounted in the ¸KR4400. This
means that there is one transmitter for
each radio. A harmonic filter bank is
switched via PIN diodes according to the
transmission frequency to ensure optimal
harmonic suppression in fixed-frequency
or EPM mode. Two low-noise, temperature-controlled fans are provided on the
rear panel for heat dissipation of the
transmitter, which allows continuous
transmission.
Main Receiver Module ¸ET4400
3
Internal AC/DC Power Supply
¸IN4400A
The ¸IN4400A is the internal AC/DC
power supply required for receiver radio
types. Its submodules are an AC/DC converter and a DC/DC converter. The AC/DC
converter delivers DC from the external
mains supply. The ¸IN4400A occupies the slot assigned to the transmitter
module. The external AC/DC Universal
Power Supply ¸IN4000A is available
for transceivers or transmitters.
In addition to the interfaces provided as
standard, interface cards can be inserted.
Slots are available for interface cards.
These cards may contain customer-specific interfaces as well as other functions.
Due to the use of a universal wideband
amplifier, only one antenna connector is
required, irrespective of the frequency
range. If separate operation of the VHF
and UHF range is required for special
applications, an external diplexer (e.g.
¸FT224) has to be used.
Backplane ¸GH4450
Remote control
The Backplane ¸GH4450 connects
optional interface cards and the transmitter module to the radio module bus. This
passive PCB does not occupy a radio
module slot. The Backplane ¸
GH4450 is required for every ¸M3SR
configuration except receivers, which do
not need interface cards.
A variety of standardized interfaces is
available for remote control of the radio
units. An integrated LAN (local area network) hub allows easy integration into
data networks. Any number of radios can
thus be controlled from a central operator
position.
Interfaces
Local control panel
A local control panel can be integrated in
the front of the Radio Basis ¸
KR4400. If a local control panel is not
required, a blank panel is fitted instead.
Comfort Control Panel (CCP)
¸GB4000C
The ½ 19" plug-in CCP is the standard
control panel and allows easy and convenient local control of the radio. All radio
functions are controlled by the ¸
GB4000C. The 5" display has softkeys and
a user-friendly, menu-guided user interface. The keypad is backlighted by LEDs.
Any additional ¸M3SR units that are
connected in the same LAN network can
be controlled and monitored from a local
control panel.
Antenna connector configurations
The connector for a combined transmitting/receiving antenna is configured as
standard (n type). Depending on the
antennas used, various connector combinations are offered. This means that
either separate or combined antenna
connectors are available for main
receiver, guard receiver and transmitter.
Backplane
Guard
receiver
EPM
processor
Synthesizer
RX
Radio modules
Interface cards
Power modules
TX
Standard I/O
Radio module bus (RMB)
Radio basis
or
Radio control and signal processing
Audio front panel with fill gun connector
Local
control
panel
4
incl. DC
power supply
AC/DC
power
supply
Block diagram of ¸M3SR
The ¸M3SR radios can be remotecontrolled via external remote control
units, other ¸M3SR units with integrated control panel, Rohde&Schwarz
remote control systems or customerspecific solutions.
Built-in test (BIT) concept
Radio failure archive
An efficient BIT concept allows identification and location of functional failures
down to module level. All failures
detected during the test can be indicated
locally and remotely.
All failures detected and error messages
are stored in the radio failure archive. The
archive can be read locally on the CCP
and remotely. Each entry also contains a
description in plain text.
◆ Power-up BIT (PBIT)
Automatic test after power-up of the
unit
◆ Continuous BIT (CBIT)
Automatic start after successful PBIT
and continuous and automatic monitoring of all modules including radio
basis during operation
◆ Initiated BIT (IBIT)
Interactive test in non-operating
status to support maintenance of the
radio units; can be triggered locally or
remotely; test and analysis of the
signal path in the radio with the aid of
test signals without disconnecting the
antenna connector (test signal generator already built in; simplified diagnostics possible without opening the
unit)
Inventory report
The software and hardware states of the
radio system are entered in full detail into
the inventory report. The report allows a
fast overview of the total configuration
status without having to open the unit.
Power supply concept
Transceivers and transmitters are supplied from DC. The external Universal
Power Supply ¸IN4000A or other
AC/DC sources provide AC supply for the
radios.
Receivers have an integrated AC/DC
power supply (¸IN4400A).
Radio type Receiver
Transmitter
Transceiver
Power supply
DC
integrated
integrated
integrated
AC/DC
integrated
external ¸IN4000A
external ¸IN4000A
5
Specifications for basic fixed-frequency radio
FM noise quieting (with input signal
–70 dBm, fm = 1 kHz;
deviation = ±3.5 kHz)
Common data for transmitter, transceiver and receiver radio
configurations
Selectivity (IF bandwidth)
Unless stated otherwise, specs are valid for the frequency range from 108 MHz
to 174 MHz and 225 MHz to 400 MHz. For the remaining ranges, minor deviations may occur.
Main RX
BW 1 for 25 kHz channel spacing
BW 2 for 8.33 kHz channel spacing
BW 3 for data
BW 4 for data
Usable frequency range
Waveforms contained in
standard radio configuration
Optional waveforms
Channel spacing
100 MHz to 512 MHz without gap
VHF (108 MHz to 173.975 MHz):
LOS FM
LOS AM
Civil ATC AM acc. to EN300676
UHF (225 MHz to 399.975 MHz):
LOS FM
LOS AM
STANAG4205
– HAVE QUICK I/II acc. to
STANAG4246
– SATURN acc. to STANAG4372
– UHF DAMA with external modem
acc. to MIL-STD-188-181/2/3 on
request
– LINK 11 with external modem acc. to
STANAG5511
– LINK 22 with external modem acc. to
– LINK 4A with external modem acc. to
– LINK Y Mk2 with external modem on
request
– SECOS voice, Rohde&Schwarz
TRANSEC/COMSEC waveform
– SECOS with data preprocessor (DPP)
– SECOS with TDMA on request
– other waveforms on request
8.33 kHz, 25 kHz
Frequency spacing
8.33 kHz, 12.5 kHz and 25 kHz synthesizer increments
Frequency drift (–20°C to +55°C)
<0.1 ppm (10–7) with OCXO
Frequency offset (for TX only)
up to 4-carrier offset mode ±2.5 kHz/
5 kHz/7.5 kHz
5-carrier offset mode on request
Preset pages (channel configuration,
including all operational parameters)
Classes of emission
200
AM: A3E, A9E, AXX (16 kbit/s baseband and diphase)
FM: F3E, F9E, FSK, FSK-MSK
Receiver data
With FM (±3.5 kHz deviation)
For (S+N)/N = 10 dB (weighted to
ITU-T) and fm = 1 kHz
Note: If a guard receiver with common main receiver antenna is installed in an
¸M3SR, the sensitivity of the main receiver is reduced by 4 dB.
AM internal noise level
(with input signal –47 dBm,
fm = 1 kHz, m = 0.3)
6
(S+N)/N ≥40 dB (modulated-tounmodulated), weighted to ITU-T
≥26 kHz/6 dB, ≤50 kHz/80 dB
≥7 kHz/6 dB, ≤13 kHz/60 dB
≥50 kHz/6 dB, ≤150 kHz/70 dB
≥70 kHz/6 dB, ≤140 kHz/60 dB on
request
RFI (radio frequency interference) suppression
Adjacent-channel rejection
Desensitization
S+N/N >10 dB, weighted to ITU-T
VHF ATC band acc. to EN300676
≥60 dB for 8.33 kHz and 25 kHz channel
spacing
wanted signal –95 dBm/m = 0.6,
unwanted signal +80 dBc
VHF at >±200 kHz
UHF at >±200 kHz
IF/image rejection
≥80 dB
Spurious rejection
80 dB
Suppression of 3rd order intermodulation products
Low-distortion mode, ref = –101 dBm,
≥70 dB
m = 30%, ∆f = 100 kHz
Local oscillator reradiation at antenna
≤–90 dBm
connector
Squelch
(S+N)/N setting range
6 dB to 20 dB
Squelch hysteresis
1.5 dB to 6 dB
Squelch attenuation (muting) (AF output with activated squelch threshold) ≤–70 dBm
AF outputs (voice) (valid for A3E and F3E in plain and fixed-frequency mode)
Line output
Impedance
Level with input signal –47 dBm,
fm = 1 kHz, m = 0.6 or ∆f = 3.5 kHz
AF response
With 25 kHz channel spacing and
input signal –47 dBm, m = 0.3
With 8.33 kHz channel spacing and
input signal –47 dBm, m = 0.3
Sensitivity
With AM (m = 0.3)
(S+N)/N ≥40 dB, weighted to ITU-T
600 Ω ±10%
0 dBm nominal (–20 dBm to +10 dBm
settable) into 600 Ω, balanced (floating) allowing external grounding;
500 V minimum isolation against
ground
300 Hz to 3500 Hz with ±2 dB
≤150 Hz with ≤–15 dB (fref = 1 kHz)
≥5000 Hz with ≤–20 dB (fref = 1 kHz)
THD (total harmonic distortion)
(with input signal –79 dBm to +3 dBm,
fm = 1 kHz and 600 Ω termination)
≤5%
With m = 0.6
≤10%
With m = 0.9
Noise peak limiter threshold range
m = 0.3 to 0.9 adjustable
AF AGC with input variation
m = 0.3 to 0.9
≤1 dB AF output variation
AF outputs (WB) (valid for A9E and F9E in plain and fixed-frequency mode)
Line output
Impedance
Level with input signal –47 dBm,
fm = 1 kHz, m = 0.9 or ±6.25 kHz
FM deviation
600 Ω ±10%
1.4 V pp nominal
(1 V to 8 V pp settable) into 600 Ω
unbalanced
AF response
With input signal –47 dBm, m = 0.9
25000 Hz with ≤–10 dB (fref = 1 kHz)
Extended frequency range on request 30 Hz to 16000 Hz with ±2 dB
THD (with input signal –79 dBm to
+3 dBm, m = 0.9, fm = 1 kHz and 600 Ω
≤10%
termination)
AF outputs (data) (valid for ASK and FSK/MSK)
Data rate
max. 32 kbit/s, higher data rates on
request
16 kbit/s baseband or diphase
m = 0.9; ∆F = ±6.25 kHz
AM modulation depth tolerance with
specified input level at AF inputs
FM frequency deviation
Voice
WB/data
configurable acc. to the mode used;
examples
3.5 kHz
6.25 kHz
AF inputs (NB voice) (valid for A3E and F3E in plain and fixed-frequency mode)
Nominal input level voice audio
0 dBm
AF line input voice
–15 dBm to +10 dBm settable, into
600 Ω ±10% balanced; transformers
with center tap for phantom circuit;
500 V minimum isolation against
ground
AF response
With 25 kHz channel spacing and
nominal input signal
With 8.33 kHz channel spacing and
nominal input signal
RF AGC
With modulated input signals AM
(m = 0.6) or FM (±4.66 kHz deviation)
–107 dBm to +1 dBm (LN mode) or
≤3 dB AF output variation
–101 dBm to +7 dBm (LD mode)
80% to 98%
AF inputs (WB)
Nominal input level wideband
1.4 V pp
AF line input WB/data
1 V to 8 V pp adjustable,
into 600 Ω ±10%
Transmitter data
Unless stated otherwise, specs refer to the antenna terminal and involve an
antenna impedance of 50 Ω (max. VSWR = 1.1), nominal output power and
nominal power supply.
AF response (valid for A9E)
With nominal input signal
Output power
AF response (valid for F9E)
With nominal input signal
AM carrier power
30 W nominal, 1 W to 30 W adjustable
FM/FSK
100 W nominal, 1 W to 100 W
adjustable
Power setting
quasi-continuously and independently
for AM and FM
Power reduction
For VSWR ≤2
For VSWR >2
For 26 V (FM)/28 V (AM) to 19 V DC
≤1 dB
graceful degradation
graceful degradation from nominal
power
AF inputs (data) (valid for ASK and FSK/MSK)
Data rate
max. 32 kbit/s, higher data rates on
request
16 kbit/s baseband or diphase
m = 0.9; ∆F = ±6.25 kHz
Distortion AM/FM
(with 0 dBm input (300 Hz to 3500 Hz)) ≤8%
Permissible mismatch without
damage
short circuit to open circuit, all phases
Duty cycle
continuous transmission
ALC (automatic level control) function
selectable
Modulation depth variation for
±15 dB, with input level setting
m = 0.8 to 0.98
–15 dBm to 0 dBm
Thermal protection
integrated temperature-controlled
fans
Noise modulation (S+N/N) (m = 0.9,
1 kHz; fm = 5 kHz)
Special tones and PTT
Unwanted emissions
Harmonics suppression
Nonharmonic spurious suppression
(for >100 kHz from carrier frequency)
Phase noise attenuation
At ∆f = ±25 kHz from carrier
At ∆f = ±1% from carrier
At ∆f = >±10 MHz
≥40 dB
VHF (108 MHz to 173.975 MHz)
UHF (225 MHz to 399.975 MHz):
≥80 dB for 2nd harmonics
≥80 dB for 3rd harmonics and higher
≥80 dBc, typ. 90 dBc
≥120 dBc (1 Hz) (VHF)/
≥110 dBc (1 Hz) (UHF)
≥150 dBc (1 Hz)
165 dBc (1 Hz)
Test tone
1 kHz/m = 0.9; generator included as
standard; for local and remote tests
Sidetone
(in plain AM/FM (normal voice) mode,
level related to adjusted RX output)
sidetone derived from carrier (AM) or
power monitor (FM) and introduced
into normal AF output
0 dB to 10 dB adjustable
PTT signalling
variety of methods (configurable):
parallel (ground or voltage), via remote
protocol or audio inband tone
(e.g. 2040 Hz) on request
7
Built-in interfaces
Serial interfaces
LAN
RF power amplifier (PA) and RF filter
control interfaces
2 serial interfaces up to 115 kbit/s; one
RS-232-C, the other one can be configured as RS-232-C/RS-422/RS-485,
parameters adjustable for radio control, configuration, user data (SECOS
mode with DPP)
5 Hz to 55 Hz, 0.4 mm double
amplitude, test period: 30 min in 3 axes
to DIN IEC68-2-6
Shock
45 Hz to 2000 Hz, ≤40 g, 3 shocks in
three axes to DIN EN68-2-27,
MIL-STD-810D method 516.3
EMI/EMC
EN301489
MIL-STD-461E: CE101, CE102, CE106,
CS101, CS114, RE102, RS101 (maximally achieved test field strength
160 dBpT), RS-103 (2 MHz to 1 GHz,
test field strength 10 V/m)
Transients and spikes (AC supply)
STANAG1008 edition 8 and
MIL-STD-1399 sec.103 type 1
Electrical safety
Directive 72/23/EEC (CE mark), IEC950,
VDE0804, VDE0805, VDE0866,
EN60950
Cooling
sensor-controlled forced-air cooling by
integrated fans, air flow direction from
front to rear side; if there is a front
door, it should have sufficient air inlets
2 interfaces acc. to Ethernet IEEE802.3,
RJ-45 connectors, 10baseT;
for radio control, configuration and
software download
2 user-configurable interfaces for
Rohde&Schwarz PA and filters: 2 × PA
or 2 × filter or 1 × filter + 1 × PA;
others on request
RF connectors for antennas
N female for TX or common TX/RX
antenna and BNC female for RX
AF standard interfaces
2 narrowband, 2 wideband;
for voice and user data
External reference frequency
for special applications; input/output
(BNC connector): 0.8/1/2/5 or 10 MHz
configurable, can be daisy-chained
Timing system
Vibration
input/output to receive/transmit TOD
(time of day) from/to external timing
system (e.g. ¸GT400) acc. to
STANAG4246, STANAG4430,
ICD-GPS-060
Key distribution device (KDD) interface
KYK-13, KOI-18, Rohde&Schwarz KDD;
(fill gun)
external maintenance tool
External crypto devices
KY58, KY57, ED4-2 (others on request)
Miscellaneous interfaces
e.g. PTT, carrier, SQ, NoGo, INHIBIT,
switched DC for external devices; other
I/Os on request
Headphones output
max. 1 V at 150 Ω (adjustable to lower
values down to 0 V), NF7-type headset
connector
Integrated loudspeaker
max. 0.4 W, volume adjustable via knob
Microphone inputs
dynamic micro: 0 mV to 25 mV into
150 Ω
amplifier micro: 0 V to 1 V/150 Ω,
15 mA to 20 mA, 9 V DC max.,
NF7-type headset connector
General data
Power supply
DC operation
28 V nominal, 19 V to 31 V with some
degradations (acc. to Directives
89/336/EEC and 72/23/EEC)
AC operation
Receiver
Transmitter, transceiver
AC/DC operation
Power consumption
(example: VHF/UHF transceiver with
CCP, EPM, guard RX)
90 V to 264 V, 47 Hz to 63 Hz
100 V to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
115 V at 50/60/400 Hz (with external
¸IN4000A)
automatic switchover; priority to AC
depending on configuration
approx. 80 W (receive mode, DC)
approx. 380 W/505 VA for VHF/UHF
30 W AM/100 W FM (transmit mode,
AC/DC)
Dimensions
Transceiver/transmitter (DC)
19" plug-in, 3 HU
Transceiver/transmitter set (AC/DC)
19" plug-in, 3 HU + 1 HU
(AC power supply)
Receiver + guard receiver (AC/DC)
19" plug-in, 3 HU, depth: 481 mm
Additional space for rear cabling
200 mm recommended
Weight
Receiver
approx. 14 kg
Operating temperature range
–20°C to +55°C
Transceiver
approx. 16.5 kg
Storage temperature range
–40°C to +70°C
EPM transceiver incl. guard receiver
approx.17.5 kg
Humidity
≤95% at +55°C to MIL-STD-810F
method 507.2 and DIN EN60068-2-30,
+25°C /+55°C
External Universal Power Supply
¸IN4000A
5.7 kg
Dust and water protection
Control unit
Radio
IP 54
IP 20, upgradeable to IP 32, for radio
front only
Fungus
protected to MIL-STD-810C method
508.2
Permissible altitude
Permanent operation and transport
MIL-STD-810F method 500.4
10000 m above sea level
Logistics
MTTR on module level
typ. 15 min
Important note: All adjustments, settings and configurations stated above can
be performed locally or remotely via software.
8
Plug-in option
Ordering information
Guard Receiver ¸ET4400G
Designation
Guard (distress) frequencies
121.5 MHz and 243 MHz in parallel at
the same time
Basic radio
Input signal protection
≤+21 dBm
Sensitivity (with AM (m = 0.3),
121.5/243 MHz)
≤–101 dBm
ITU-T S+N/N = 10 dB
Sensitivity with built-in ¸FD4430
–99 dBm
ITU-T S+N/N = 12 dB
Image and spurious rejection
80 dB
Selectivity (IF bandwidth)
≥30 kHz/6 dB, ≤75 kHz/60 dB
AM internal noise level
(with input signal –47 dBm,
fm = 1 kHz, m = 0.8)
Type
Order No.
¸M3SR Basic Unit Hardware for split-site
receiver radios, without CCP, without soft¸MR4400E 6057.8496.02
ware, AC/DC
¸M3SR Basic Unit Hardware for split-site
transmitter radios; without CCP, without
¸MR4400S 6057.8544.02
software, DC
¸M3SR Basic Unit Hardware for transceiver radios, without CCP, without software,
¸MR4400X 6057.8596.02
DC
Options
(S+N)/N = 40 dB (modulated-tounmodulated), weighted to ITU-T
Frequency Range VHF, 108 MHz to 174 MHz ¸FR4400U
6057.8644.02
Frequency Range UHF, 225 MHz to 400 MHz ¸FR4400D
6057.8696.02
Frequency Range VHF/UHF, 100 MHz to
512 MHz
¸FR4400T
6057.8744.02
VHF/UHF Guard Receiver, optional module,
121.5 MHz and 243 MHz1)
¸ET4400G
6102.8508.02
Optional Software for fixed frequency and
LINK 11 operation1)
¸DS4400A 6102.2000.13
Antenna Interface for separate receive and
transmit antennas1)
¸GI4403
6103.4758.02
Antenna Interface for separate guard RX and
¸GI4403
combined RX/TX antennas1)
6103.4758.03
Antenna Interface for separate guard RX,
main RX and TX antennas1)
¸GI4403
6103.4758.04
¸GB4000C 6105.6006.02
Recommended extras
ISO 9001
AS 9100
DQS REG. NO 1954 QM
DQS REG. NO 1954 AS
Certified Environmental System
Local Comfort Control Panel (CCP)
ISO 14001
AQAP-110
Protection Processor Module for EPM
operation
¸GP4400
6102.9504.03
DQS REG. NO 1954 UM
Audit report GP Q2-NO 96.07
Frequency Agile Filter Module
¸FD4430
6103.2003.02
SECOS Waveform Software for voice operation
¸GS4400
on request
SECOS DPP Waveform Software for voice
operation (voice + data)
¸GS4400
on request
SECOS Waveform Software for voice operation (voice + data + TDMA)
¸GS4400
on request
HAVE QUICK I Waveform Software for voice
¸GS4400
operation
on request
HAVE QUICK II Waveform Software for voice
¸GS4400
operation
6057.8796.05
SATURN Waveform Software for voice
operation
6057.8796.06
¸GS4400
Interface Card for UHF DAMA operation with
external modem
¸GI4402
on request
Packages for later upgrade to SECOS, HAVE QUICK I/II, SATURN, etc, on
request.
9
Auxiliary equipment
Power supply
Universal Power Supply (external AC)
¸IN4000A
Power supply cable for ¸IN4000A, 1 m
6105.5500.03
6105.5639.10
Compatible remote control units
Ordering example:
The customer wishes to purchase an ¸M3SR that includes:
– transceiver
– VHF/UHF range (100 MHz to 512 MHz)
– LINK 11 function and HAVE QUICK II.
Type
Order No.
¸GB4000C 6105.6006.03
Remote Control Units of ¸Series400U2)
¸GB406xx
on request
Handset, rugged type
¸GA013
0693.7712.02
Headset, standard type
¸GA015
0583.6012.02
Headset, light type
¸GA015L
6082.9663.02
Headset, rugged type
¸GA012
0693.7664.02
Microphone, dynamic, handheld type
¸GA016H1 0583.5568.02
¸GB4000C on request
Audio accessories
The following components need to be selected:
Designation
Comfort Control Unit (DC)
Comfort Control Unit (AC/DC)
(suitable for all radio types, incl. software)
Add item
Basic radio
...
External filters and amplifiers
¸M3SR Basic Unit for transceiver radios,
without CCP, without software, DC
¸MR 4400X 6057.8596.02
All Rohde&Schwarz filters and amplifiers in the radio frequency range are
suitable. They can be remote-controlled via the basic radio.
✓
Options
Mating connectors (suitable for all radio types)
...
Frequency Range VHF/UHF, 100 MHz to
512 MHz
¸FR 4400T
6057.8744.02
✓
Full Connector Set
¸ZF4410
6105.9011.02
Connector Set without circular connector
¸ZF4410
6105.9011.03
Recommended extras
Antennas
...
VHF (100 MHz to 163 MHz)
¸HK012
0459.7611.02
UHF (225 MHz to 400 MHz)
¸HK001
0425.2781.03
VHF/UHF (100 MHz to 1300 MHz)
¸HK014
0644.1514.02
¸FT224
0525.5117.03
¸GT400
on request
Optional Software for fixed frequency and
LINK 11 operation
¸DS 4400A 6102.2000.13
✓
...
Miscellaneous
Protection Processor Module for EPM
operation
¸GP 4400
6102.9504.03
VHF/UHF Diplexer (100 MHz to 163 MHz/
225 MHz to 400 MHz)
✓
...
Timing System
HAVE QUICK II Waveform Software for voice
operation
¸GS 4400
6057.8796.05
✓
1)
...
2)
For the correct order number
and type of your equipment,
please contact your Rohde & Schwarz
representative.
3)
3)
Also available as upgrade kit.
With ¸GB406xx, only the operational remote-control functions of ¸M3SR are available. Please ask for special firmware to control ¸M3SR.
Recommended for time synchronization of frequency hopping systems, including GPS receiver
and disciplined rubidium oscillator.
Correct order number:
6102.0607.13
for product
¸XT 4460J
www.rohde-schwarz.com
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde&Schwarz GmbH&Co. KG · Trade names are trademarks of the owners · Printed in Germany (Pe sk)
PD 0758.1093.32 · Digital Reprogrammable Software Radios ¸M3SR · Version 03.00 · February 2004 · Data without tolerance limits is not binding · Subject to change
R&S M3SR RADIOS
Service Manual • Error List
Error Code List
Note:
This is the complete error list for all R&S M3SR radios
(transceivers, transmitters and receivers).
Control unit errors are listed separately (see below).
Level E = Error
Level W = Warning
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
frequent or single event)
0100
PL +2.5 VLOW
E
Platform error:
+2.5V reference low
Perform troubleshooting.
0101
PL BATT LOW
W
Platform warning:
battery low
Replace the platform battery.
0102
PL RET VOLT LOW
E
Platform error:
Retention voltage low
0103
PL INT +10V LOW
E
Platform error:
Internal +10V low
0105
PL INT -10V LOW
E
Platform error:
Internal -10V low
0106
PL OVERTEMP
W
Platform warning:
Overtemperature
Check airflow of fans and ambient
temperature. If this fails to eliminate
the fault, perform troubleshooting.
0107
TX PTT TIMEOUT
W
TX PTT timeout expired
Check PTT timeout configuration.
Check PTT cables.
0200
PS -12V LOW
E
DC power supply error:
-12V low
CBIT message or frequent event: Perform troubleshooting.
Single event:
no action
0201
PS +3.3V LOW
E
+3.3V low
Single event:
no action
0202
PS +5V LOW
E
+5V low
Single event:
no action
0203
PS +12V LOW
E
+12V low
Single event:
no action
0204
PS +33V LOW
E
+33V low
Single event:
no action
6124.8652.82.04
–1–
R&S M3SR RADIOS
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
0205
PS MAIN VOLT LOW
W
DC power supply warning:
Main voltage low
CBIT message:
Frequent event:
Check configuration (relevant menu,
function PWR SUP). Switch off and
check external power supply, cables
and connectors at X31. If this fails to
eliminate the fault, send the radio to
depot.
Single event:
and connectors at X31.
0206
PS BATT VOLT LOW
W
Battery voltage low
CBIT message:
Frequent event:
and connectors at X31. If this fails to
depot.
Single event:
and connectors at X31.
0207
PS VOLT LW VLIM
W
Voltage lower than voltage
limit
CBIT message or frequent event:
Single event:
no action
0208
PS VOLT EXT SW LOW
W
Voltage for external switch
low
Single event:
no action
0209
PS 28V LT AMP LOW
W
28V for left amplifier low
Single event:
no action
0210
PS 28V RT AMP LOW
W
28V for right amplifier low
Single event:
no action
0211
PS 28V DRV AMP LOW
W
DC power supply warning: CBIT message or frequent event: Per28V for driver amplifier low
form troubleshooting.
Single event:
no action
0213
PS OVERTEMP
W
Overtemperature
Single event:
temperature.
0214
PS SPEED FAN LOW
W
Fan speed low (fan 1 and
fan 2)
Single event:
temperature.
–2–
6124.8652.82.04
R&S M3SR RADIOS
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
0218
PS AC/DC OVERTEMP
W
0250
SY DEF
E
Synthesizer error:
Module defective
Single event:
no action
0251
SY VOLT ERR
E
Synthesizer error:
Voltage error
Single event:
no action
0252
SY SYNC
E
Synthesizer error:
Synchronization error / bad
time reference
Single event:
no action
0253
SY EXT REF NOT PRES
E
Synthesizer error:
External reference not
present
Single event:
no action
0254
SY LEV LO OSC
E
Synthesizer error:
Level of local oscillator not
ok
Single event:
no action
0255
SY BW INVALID
E
Synthesizer error:
Invalid bandwidth commanded
Single event:
no action
0256
SY PLL UNLOCKED
E
Synthesizer error:
PLL unlocked
Single event:
no action
0257
SY INVALID FRQ
W
Synthesizer warning:
Invalid frequency commanded
Inform the depot.
0270
HSELU INVALID FRQ
W
Invalid frequency commanded
Inform the depot.
0271
HSELU NO OUTPOW
E
No output power (only in Tx
mode including IBIT TX of Switch off an check internal RF cables
radio). The error message and connectors. If this fails to elimidisappears after the next
nate the fault, perform troubleshootfaultless transmission.
ing.
Single event:
no action
0272
HSELU NO INPOW
E
No input power (only in Tx
mode including IBIT TX of Switch off an check internal RF cables
radio). The error message and connectors. If this fails to eliminate the fault, perform troubleshootdisappears after the next
ing.
faultless transmission.
Single event:
no action
0273
HSELU VOLT ERR
E
6124.8652.82.04
Overtemperature of exter- Switch off and check external AC/DC
nal AC/DC
Power Supply IN 4000A, cables and
connectors. If this fails to eliminate the
fault, perform troubleshooting.
Single event:
Switch off and check external AC/DC
Power Supply IN 4000A, cables and
connectors.
Pre/postselector voltage
error
Single event:
no action
–3–
R&S M3SR RADIOS
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
0274
HSELU DEFECT
E
Pre/postselector defective
Single event:
no action
0301
RX EXT REF NOT PRES
E
Receiver error:
present
Single event:
no action
0302
RX IF PART OVERLOAD
E
Receiver error:
IF part overload
Single event:
no action
0303
RX IN SIG OVERLOAD
W
Receiver warning:
Input signal overload
Receive signal too large. Switch off
and check RF cables. If this fails to
eliminate the fault, perform troubleshooting.
Single event:
and check RF cables.
0304
RX GEN ERR
E
Receiver error:
General error
Single event:
no action
0305
RX WATCHDOG
E
Receiver error:
Reset caused by watchdog
0306
RX INT REF DEF
E
Receiver error:
Internal reference defective
0307
RX IF PART DEF
E
Receiver error:
IF part defective
0308
RX INT LO DEF
E
Receiver error:
Internal local oscillator
defective
Single event:
no action
0309
RX EXT LO NOT PRES
E
Receiver error:
External local oscillator not
present
CBIT message:
frequent event:
Switch off and check RF cables. If this
fails to eliminate the fault, perform
troubleshooting.
Single event:
no action
0310
RX OVERTEMP
W
Receiver warning:
RX overtemperature
the fault, send the radio to the depot.
Single event:
temperature.
0350
TX GLOBAL ERROR
E
Transmitter error:
Power off due to global
error
0351
TX PIN DIODE SW DEF
E
Transmitter error:
PIN diode switch defective
0352
TX POW REDUCED
E
Transmitter error:
Output power reduced
Single event:
no action
–4–
6124.8652.82.04
R&S M3SR RADIOS
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
0354
TX OVERTEMP
W
Transmitter warning:
Power off due to overtemperature
Single event:
temperature.
0355
TX WATCHDOG
E
Transmitter error:
0356
TX INCORR CMD
W
Received incorrect command
Inform the depot.
0357
TX OVERVOLTAGE
W
Overvoltage
Switch off and check DC power supply. If this fails to eliminate the fault,
perform troubleshooting.
Single event:
Switch off and check DC power supply.
0358
TX EXT REF NOT PRES
E
Transmitter error:
present
Single event:
no action
0359
TX VSWR
W
VSWR above limit
Switch off and check antenna cabling.
If this fails to eliminate the fault, perform troubleshooting.
0360
TX IN DRIVE MISSING
E
Transmitter error:
Input drive missing
Single event:
no action
0361
TX POW CTL LOOP LIM
E
Transmitter error:
Power control loop out of
limits
Single event:
no action
0362
TX POW REDUCED
W
Output power reduced
Check airflow of fans, ambient temperature, antenna cabling and DC
power supply. If this fails to eliminate
0363
TX TEMP SENS SH
E
Transmitter error:
Temperature sensor is
shorted
0400
GRX WATCHDOG
E
Guard receiver error:
0401
GRX EXT REF NOT PRES
E
present
Single event:
no action
0402
GRX VCO1 NOT LOCKED
E
VCO1 not locked
Single event:
no action
0403
GRX VCO2 NOT LOCKED
E
VCO2 not locked
Single event:
no action
6124.8652.82.04
–5–
R&S M3SR RADIOS
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
0404
GRX IN SIG OVERLOAD
W
Guard receiver warning:
Input signal overload
Single event:
0450
PP EXT REF NOT PRES
E
Protection processor error:
present
Single event:
no action
0451
PP PLL UNLOCKED
E
PLL unlocked
Single event:
no action
0453
PP SRC RX ERR
E
FIFO error of sample rate
converter RX
Single event:
no action
0454
PP NOT PRESENT
E
Not present
0500
AFI WATCHDOG
E
Audio frequency interface
error:
0501
AFI BUFFER OVERFLOW
W
warning:
Sample buffer overflow
0502
AFI INCORR CMD
W
warning:
Received incorrect command
Inform the depot.
0503
AFI CODEC ERROR
E
error:
CODEC error
Single event:
no action
0550
FPGA1 R/W ERR
E
Platform error:
Read/write error
0551
FPGA2 R/W ERR
E
Platform error:
Read/write error
0552
FPGA3 R/W ERR
E
Platform error:
Read/write error
0600
IF CBIT OF EXT AMP
W
Pin TEST1 X27.8 / X28.8
CBIT warning of external
amplifier
Switch off and check external amplifier / filter, cables and connectors. If
this fails to eliminate the fault, perform
troubleshooting.
Single event:
Switch off and check external amplifier / filter, cables and connectors.
0601
IF CBIT OF EXT AMP
W
Pin TEST0 X27.35 /
X28.35
CBIT warning of external
amplifier
Switch off and check external amplifier / filter, cables and connectors. If
this fails to eliminate the fault, perform
troubleshooting.
Single event:
Switch off and check external amplifier / filter, cables and connectors.
–6–
6124.8652.82.04
R&S M3SR RADIOS
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
0602
IF VSWR OF EXT AMP
W
Pin VSWR
X27.20 / 37
X28.20 / 37
If this fails to eliminate the fault, perVSWR warning of external
form troubleshooting.
amplifier
Single event:
0603
EXT PA TUNING X27
W
Pin TX_INHIBIT 0 X27.4
Tuning error of external filter (testing period 20 s
before output of warning)
Switch off and check external filter,
cables and connectors. If this fails to
0604
EXT PA TUNING X27
W
0605
EXT PA TUNING X28
W
0606
EXT PA TUNING X28
W
0607
EXT PA LOW CARRIER
W
External amplifier has low
drive level
If this fails to eliminate the fault, perform troubleshooting.
Single event:
0700
PL PLL1 UNLOCKED
W
Platform warning:
PLL1 unlocked
Single event:
no action
0701
PL PLL1 NO REF FREQ
W
Platform warning:
PLL1 no reference frequency detected
EXT REF).
Check the cabling at interface X10.
If required, change the configuration
or replace the cable if external reference is ok.
0702
PL OCXO TEMP
W
Platform warning:
PLL1 OCXO temperature
low
Warning occurs either when changing
from TCXO to OCXO or while ovencontrolled oscillator is in warm-up
phase.
0703
PL PLL2 UNLOCKED
E
Platform error:
PLL2 unlocked
Single event:
no action
0704
PL PLL2 NO REF FREQ
E
Platform error:
PLL2 no reference frequency detected
function EXT REF).
Check the cabling at interface X10.
If required, change the configuration
or replace the cable if external reference is ok.
0800
SECOS NOGO
E
0801
HAVE QUICK NOGO
E
0802
SATURN NOGO
E
0803
HPP PBIT FAILURE
E
0804
HPP BATTERY LOW
W
6124.8652.82.04
HPP battery shall be exchanged.
Send the radio to the depot.
–7–
R&S M3SR RADIOS
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
0805
HPP INTERNAL ERROR
E
0806
HPP TIME ERASED
W
0900
UDC INVALID FRQ
W
UDC
frequency out of range
Inform the depot.
0901
UDC PLL UNLOCK
W
UDC
PLL unlock
Single event:
no action
0902
UDC OVERTEMP
W
UDC
Overtemperature
the fault, send the radio to the depot.
Single event:
temperature.
0903
UDC GENERAL ERR
E
UDC
General Error
Single event:
no action
0904
UDC RECOVERY FW
E
UDC
Recovery FW loaded
Download the module firmeware
again.
0905
UDC RF OVERLOAD
W
UDC
RX RF overload
the depot.
Single event:
0906
UDC TX IF LEVEL
W
UDC
input TX IF level too low
TX IF signal too low. Switch off and
check RF cables and external modem
level. If this fails to eliminate the fault,
send the radio to the depot.
Single event:
Synthesizer signal too low. Switch off
0908
UDC SY LEVEL
W
UDC
SY input level too low
the depot.
Single event:
0909
UDC TX LEVEL (future use)
W
UDC
TX output level too low/
high
2003
IBIT RX RSSI F <count>
E
Receiver RSSI level below Repeat IBIT several times. If the fault
minimum limit at <freq>
persists, switch off and check RF
cables. If this fails to eliminate the
fault, send the radio to the depot.
2004
IBIT RX FM F <count>
E
Receiver FM test failed at
<freq>
–8–
Repeat IBIT several times. If the fault
6124.8652.82.04
R&S M3SR RADIOS
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
2005
IBIT RX FSK F <count>
E
Receiver FSK test failed at Repeat IBIT several times. If the fault
<freq>
2007
IBIT GRX <VHF/UHF>
E
No test tone detected of Repeat IBIT several times. If the fault
guard receiver <VHF/UHF>
at <121.5/243 > MHz
2008
IBIT TX SIDET F <count>
E
Transmitter sidetone miss- Repeat IBIT several times. If the fault
ing at <freq>
2010
IBIT TX POWER F <count>
E
Transmitter power too low
at <freq>
6124.8652.82.04
Repeat IBIT several times. If the fault
–9–
R&S M3SR RADIOS
Control Unit Error Code List (irrelevant for remote-controlled radios)
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
0002
GR General Software Error
W
0003
GR ERR STR FULL
W
Error store full
1000
CP +28V RANGE
W
Control panel +28 VDC
out of range
1001
CP +2.5V RANGE
W
Control panel +2.5 VDC out
of range
1002
CP +3.3V RANGE
W
Control panel +3.3 VDC
out of range
Single event:
no action
1003
CP +5.0V RANGE
W
Control panel +5.0 VDC
out of range
Single event:
no action
1004
CP +12V RANGE
W
Control panel +12 VDC
out of range
Single event:
no action
1005
CP -12V RANGE
W
Control panel -12 VDC
out of range
Single event:
no action
1006
CP OVERTEMP
W
Control panel
overtemperature
Check / correct ambient temperature
(must be below 55 °C). If this fails to
the depot.
1007 *)
CP SRAM BATT LOW
W
Control panel interfaces
SRAM battery low
3000
TEST1 ALTERA_RDBK
E
Read back test of FPGA
failed
3001
TEST1 EPSON_RDBK
E
Read back test of the display controller failed
3005
TEST3 LOOPB KDD
E
Loopback test of the KDD
serial port failed
3006
TEST3 LOOPB SMC2
E
Loopback test of the serial
port SMC2 failed
*)
The SRAM battery is not a replaceable battery but a gold capacitor.
– 10 –
6124.8652.82.04
Antennas
Power Supply
R&S IN 4000A
Control Units
R&S HK 014
not shown:
R&S HK 012
R&S HK 001
R&S GB 4000C
(remote version)
not shown:
R&S GB 406.. on request
Handsets and Headsets
Filter and Amplifiers
R&S GA 015
not shown:
R&S GA 012
R&S GA 013
R&S GA 016H1
R&S FD 430
not shown:
R&S VU 210L
R&S VU 220L
R&S VD 480L
6125.1651.12.02
Mating Connector
not shown:
R&S ZF 4410
– R.1 / R.2 –
Control and Display Elements
LED on:
1 to 4
Communication line selected (2 to 4 disabled)
LOCAL
Local operation selected
BATT
Battery operation
AC / DC
AC / DC operation
Numerical keypad:
Softkeys:
Display:
Input of
Selecting menu-dependent
functions
• Display of menus
• Numerical values
• Display of menu-dependent softkey
functions
• Decimal point
Key + / • Incrementing or decrementing selection
Keys:
LED on:
Tuning knob:
ON / OFF
ON
• Tuning values
• ON: switching radio ON
Control unit is on
• Selecting menus
• OFF: switching only control unit
off
CU
MENU HOME
Switching to start menu 040
Control unit ok
G
Squelch guard receiver active
GO
Radio ok
RESET button:
Keys:
Resetting the transceiver
SELECT
Keys:
KEY
Selecting communication line
1 (2 to 4 disabled) = Rx and /
or GRx signal
ENT
Key system on
LOCAL
• Confirming entries
GO
• Initiating processes
Radio ok
Selecting local / remote
operation (toggle function)
ESC CLR
CARR
Loudspeaker / headphone
volume control:
ON / OFF
• Deleting entries
Carrier activated
Low volume
• Aborting processes
Switching transceiver
on or off (toggle function)
SQL M
Control turned fully
counter-clockwise
LED on:
Squelch main receiver active
SQLG
Squelch guard receiver active
Full volume
Control turned fully clockwise
6125.1651.12.02 – D.1 / D.2 –
External Interfaces
Note:
Mating connectors are contained
in R&S ZF 4410 Connector Set
(part no. 6105.9011).
(X5)
(X7)
(X6)
A
A
B
F
B
F
C
E
C
E
D
G
D
Mating Connector:
6-way cable plug
(FO 0650.6495)
6125.1651.12.02
Mating Connector:
8-way cable plug
(FT 6083.5984)
Mating Connector:
7-way cable plug
(FO 0586.8239)
Shrink-on part
(FO 0586.8245)
– E.1 / E.2 –
External Interfaces
Mating Connector:
44-way male multipoint
connector
(FM 6104.9547)
Pin contacts
(FM 1006.4504)
Shielded case
Mating Connectors:
Cable plug system BNC
(FJ 0272.5930)
Mating Connector:
connector
(FM 1006.4491)
Pin contacts
Mating Connector:
(FM 1006.4504)
Shielded case
connector
(FM 0586.9870)
(FM 0048.3368)
1
10
Pin contacts
(FM 0520.6344)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9870)
1
16
Mating Connector:
Cable plug system N
(FJ 0087.8850)
44
1
15
Mating Connector:
connector
(FM 6104.9530)
Pin contacts
(FM 1006.4504)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9564)
1
9
10
26
Note:
Note:
External interfaces shown without mounting dustcap set (order
information: 6122.4708.02).
Mating connectors are contained
in Connector Set ZF 4410
(part no. 6105.9011).
1
1
10
9
1
11
1
Mating Connector:
9-way multipoint
connector
(FM 0048.3368)
Pin contacts
(FM 0520.6344)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9870)
1
5
A1
Mating Connector:
3-way female multipoint
connector
(FM 0070.0800)
High-current contacts
(FP 0531.9233)
Shielded case
(FM 0652.9979)
1
44
A1
Mating Connector:
5-way female multipoint
connector
(FM 0066.0173)
Socket contacts
(FM 0520.6338)
High-current socket contacts
(FP 0531.9233)
Shielded case
(FM 0652.9979)
Mating Connector:
8-way cable plug
(FT 6083.5984)
16
Mating Connector:
connector
(FM 6104.9547)
Pin contacts
(FM 1006.4504)
Shielded case
(FM 0627.1826)
10
Mating Connector:
15-way female
multipoint connector
10
11
(FM 1003.0866)
Socket contacts
Mating Connector:
15-way female multipoint (FM 1006.7410)
Shielded case
connector
(FM 0586.9870)
(FM 1003.0866)
Socket contacts
(FM 1006.7410)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9870)
26
Mating Connector:
26-way female
multipoint connector
(FM 1006.7403)
Socket contacts
(FM 1006.7410)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9564)
6125.1651.12.01 – E.3 / E.4 –
see page 2
Menu Structure (page 1 of 3)
0000: Main Menu
3000: Emergency Mode
4000: Fixed Frequency
7000: Special Modes
9000: Context Menu
6125.1651.12.01 - M.1 / M.2
see page 3
Menu Structure (page 2 of 3)
1000: Maintenance
1200: Preset Configuration
1300: Control Unit Maintenance
1400: Supervisor Access
6125.1651.12.01 - M.3 / M.4
Menu 1116
not shown
Folder General
not shown
Folder Context
not shown
Menu Structure
(page 3 of 3)
1100: Radio Maintenance
6125.1651.12.01 - M.5 / M.6

SÄNDTAG VHF/UHF M3952-722010 SÄNDTAG VHF/UHF

Transcription

Similar documents

BatFink indicator

Service Manual

Tutorial PDF File Format Software Illustrator

CEFD JUN 05 SatMag 3 Quarter page.cdr

DTS CD to DVD - Surroundbyus.com

VP8 and H.264 Codec performance

Price $ 219,000.00 - Aruba Real Estate

superset 4025 - Santee School District

FM/AM/CD/USB

PFA Models Brochure